advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
500
FF230001 Owner’s Manual BL00005235-200 EN Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that you have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be read by all who use the product. For the Latest Information The latest versions of the manuals are available from: https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/ The website can be accessed not only from your computer but also from smartphones and tablets. It also contains information on the software license. For information on firmware updates, visit: https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/ ii P Chapter Index Menu List iv 1 Before You Begin 1 2 First Steps 39 3 Basic Photography and Playback 59 4 Movie Recording and Playback 67 5 Taking Photographs 75 6 The Shooting Menus 125 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 213 8 Network/USB Setting Menus 241 9 The Setup Menus 331 10 Shortcuts 375 11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393 12 Technical Notes 419 iii Menu List Camera menu options are listed below. Menu List Shooting Menus Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies. N See page 125 for details. Photo Menus N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF 1⁄4 FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT COLOR CHROME FX BLUE SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT DYNAMIC RANGE D RANGE PRIORITY 2⁄4 WHITE BALANCE TONE CURVE COLOR SHARPNESS iv P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P 126 HIGH ISO NR 127 CLARITY 128 LONG EXPOSURE NR 129 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER 3⁄4 130 COLOR SPACE 132 xF PIXEL MAPPING 132 x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 133 AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 133 4⁄4 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 133 134 135 136 140 140 140 140 141 141 141 141 142 142 142 143 Menu List P A SHOOTING SETTING SELF-TIMER 146 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING 146 SELF-TIMER LAMP 146 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 146 147 1⁄3 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING 150 INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE 151 AE BKT SETTING 151 FILM SIMULATION BKT 151 FOCUS BKT SETTING 152 PHOTOMETRY 152 SHUTTER TYPE 153 155 2⁄3 FLICKER REDUCTION FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 157 ISO 158 IS MODE 158 35mm FORMAT MODE xF COOLING FAN SETTING 159 3⁄3 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 159 159 F FLASH SETTING 160 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING 160 RED EYE REMOVAL 161 TTL-LOCK MODE 162 LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING P 164 165 165 166 168 168 169 169 169 169 170 171 171 171 172 172 173 173 P 174 174 175 175 176 176 v Menu List G AF/MF SETTING FOCUS AREA AF MODE ZONE CUSTOM SETTING AF MODE ALL SETTING 1⁄3 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION AF POINT DISPLAYyz xF WRAP FOCUS POINT NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS PRE-AF xF AF ILLUMINATOR g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 2⁄3 SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING AF+MF MF ASSIST INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING FOCUS CHECK INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA xF INSTANT AF SETTING 3⁄3 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY xF AF RANGE LIMITER TOUCH SCREEN MODE Movie Menus N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu. Menu List P P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING B MOVIE SETTING MOVIE SETTING LIST 177 194 F FILM SIMULATION IMAGE FORMAT 177 194 F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR MOVIE MODE 178 195 F DYNAMIC RANGE HIGH SPEED REC 179 195 F WHITE BALANCE 1⁄4 180 1⁄2 F TONE CURVE F SELF-TIMER 195 MEDIA REC SETTING 181 195 F COLOR HDMI OUTPUT SETTING 184 196 F SHARPNESS FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION 185 196 F HIGH ISO NR F-Log/HLG RECORDING 186 INTERFRAME NR 196 DATA LEVEL SETTING 187 196 xF PIXEL MAPPING 187 2⁄2 F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY F PHOTOMETRY 197 187 F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 197 PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION F 2⁄4 188 F IS MODE xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 197 188 F IS MODE BOOST 189 F ISO ZEBRA SETTING 189 ZEBRA LEVEL 189 WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE 190 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 191 191 F REC FRAME INDICATOR 3⁄4 TALLY LIGHT 192 193 xF COOLING FAN SETTING F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 193 F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM 193 SETTING 4⁄4 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 193 vi Menu List P P AUDIO SETTING P INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 205 198 EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUST198 205 MENT 199 MIC JACK SETTING 206 199 MIC LEVEL LIMITER 206 1⁄2 200 WIND FILTER 206 200 LOW CUT FILTER 207 HEADPHONES VOLUME 207 200 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE 207 208 201 2⁄2 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING 201 Q TIME CODE SETTING P 201 TIME CODE DISPLAY START TIME SETTING 202 COUNT UP SETTING 202 DROP FRAME 202 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT 202 TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING 203 204 209 209 210 210 211 211 vii Menu List G AF/MF SETTING F FOCUS AREA F AF MODE F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING xF WRAP FOCUS POINT 1⁄2 xF AF ILLUMINATOR Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING F AF+MF F MF ASSIST F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING F FOCUS CHECK 2⁄2 xF INSTANT AF SETTING xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE xF AF RANGE LIMITER F TOUCH SCREEN MODE FOCUS CHECK LOCK The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. N See page 220 for details. Menu List C PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ERASE 1⁄3 SIMULTANEOUS DELETE CROP RESIZE PROTECT viii P C PLAY BACK MENU P 220 IMAGE ROTATE 229 221 VOICE MEMO SETTING 230 223 RATING 231 224 COPY 232 2⁄3 226 TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 233 226 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 235 227 DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK 235 228 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST 236 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) 238 3⁄3 instax PRINTER PRINT 239 DISP ASPECT 240 Menu List Setup Menus Adjust basic camera settings. N See page 331 for details. P D SOUND SETTING P AF BEEP VOL. 332 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 333 OPERATION VOL. 333 F REC START/STOP VOLUME 334 335 1⁄2 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 335 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER 335 SOUND 336 s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 336 s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 337 337 2⁄2 PLAYBACK VOLUME 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK 338 338 339 339 339 340 340 340 341 341 ix Menu List D USER SETTING FORMAT b AREA SETTING DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE 1⁄2 Qa x MY MENU SETTING F MY MENU SETTING SENSOR CLEANING BATTERY AGE 2⁄2 RESET REGULATORY Menu List P D SCREEN SETTING P D SCREEN SETTING VIEW MODE SETTING 342 LOCATION INFO 353 EVF BRIGHTNESS 342 SUB MONITOR SETTING 353 EVF COLOR 342 4⁄4 SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR 356 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 343 356 x Q MENU BACKGROUND 1⁄4 LCD BRIGHTNESS 344 356 F Q MENU BACKGROUND LCD COLOR 344 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 344 IMAGE DISP. 345 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 345 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 346 NATURAL LIVE VIEW 346 F-Log VIEW ASSIST 347 2⁄4 ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING 347 FRAMING GUIDELINE 347 AUTOROTATE PB 348 PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION 348 FOCUS SCALE UNITS 348 DUAL DISPLAY SETTING 349 EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION 349 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 349 3⁄4 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 350 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 351 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 352 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 352 x Menu List P D POWER MANAGEMENT 357 357 357 358 358 359 359 359 360 360 360 361 361 361 362 362 363 364 365 AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE SHOOTING STAND BY MODE AUTO POWER SAVE AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. D SAVE DATA SETTING FRAME NO. EDIT FILE NAME x CARD SLOT SETTING SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) 1⁄2 SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO DEFAULT CAPTION IPTC 2⁄2 GEOTAGGING P 366 367 368 368 368 P 369 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 373 xi Menu List D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING 1⁄3 COMMAND DIAL SETTING o S.S. OPERATION COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION SHUTTER AF SHUTTER AE SHOOT WITHOUT LENS SHOOT WITHOUT CARD FOCUS RING 2⁄3 FOCUS RING OPERATION AE/AF-LOCK MODE AWB-LOCK MODE EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING 3⁄3 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING LOCK The Network/USB Settings Menu Adjust camera network and USB settings. Menu List P I NETWORK/USB SETTING CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING 313 SELECT CONNECTION SETTING 318 AIRPLANE MODE 319 Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING 320 1⁄2 instax PRINTER CONNECTION 323 SETTING Frame.io Camera to Cloud 323 FTP OPTIONAL SETTING 326 USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM 328 SETTING INFORMATION 329 2⁄2 RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING 329 xii P Table of Contents Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii Menu List...............................................................................................................iv Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix The Network/USB Settings Menu ........................................................................xii Supplied Accessories ..................................................................................xxvii About This Manual......................................................................................xxviii Symbols and Conventions .................................................................................xxviii Terminology ................................................................................................................xxviii 1 Before You Begin 1 Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2 The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................6 The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable).....................................................6 The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................6 The Mode Dial ....................................................................................................................7 The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch ...............................................................................8 The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................8 The Command Dials.......................................................................................................9 The Indicator Lamp...................................................................................................... 10 The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 11 The Viewfinder .................................................................................................. 12 Attaching the Viewfinder ......................................................................................... 13 The Eye Cup...................................................................................................................... 14 Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 15 Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 16 The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 16 The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 18 Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 20 Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 22 Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 22 The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 22 xiii The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 24 Customizing the Standard Display..................................................................... 25 Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 27 The Secondary LCD Monitor .................................................................................. 28 Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 32 The Menus......................................................................................................................... 32 Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 33 Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 34 Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 34 Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 38 2 First Steps 39 3 Basic Photography and Playback 59 4 Movie Recording and Playback 67 Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 40 Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 41 Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 43 Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 45 Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 47 Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 48 Using an external SSD in place of a memory card ................................... 49 Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 50 Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 54 Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 55 Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 56 Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 58 Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 58 Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 60 Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 63 HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 64 Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 66 Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 68 Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 72 Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 73 xiv Table of Contents 5 Taking Photographs 75 6 The Shooting Menus 125 P, S, A, and M Modes........................................................................................ 76 Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 76 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 78 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 80 Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 82 Custom Modes ............................................................................................................... 86 Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 92 Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 93 Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 95 Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 97 Manual Focus...................................................................................................101 Checking Focus ........................................................................................................... 103 Sensitivity..........................................................................................................106 AUTO .................................................................................................................................. 107 Metering ............................................................................................................108 Exposure Compensation .............................................................................109 Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................110 Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 111 Bracketing .........................................................................................................112 W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 113 V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 113 s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 114 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................117 Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................119 Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot ....................................................................................121 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................126 IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 126 IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 127 RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 128 SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 129 FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 130 MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 132 GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 132 xv COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 133 COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 133 SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 133 DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 134 D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 135 WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 136 TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 140 COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 140 SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 140 HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 140 CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 141 LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 141 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 141 COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 141 xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 142 x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 142 AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 142 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 143 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................146 FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 146 AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 146 ZONE CUSTOM SETTING ....................................................................................... 146 AF MODE ALL SETTING .......................................................................................... 146 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 147 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 150 AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 151 xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 151 NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 151 PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 152 xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 152 g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 153 SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 155 AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 157 MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 158 INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING .......................................................... 158 FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 159 xvi Table of Contents INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 159 xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 159 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 160 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 160 xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 161 TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 162 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................164 SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 164 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 165 SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 165 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 166 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 168 INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ................................................................................... 168 AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 169 FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 169 FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 169 PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 169 SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 170 FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 171 FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 171 ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 171 IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 172 35mm FORMAT MODE ........................................................................................... 172 xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 173 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 173 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................174 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 174 RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 174 TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 175 LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 175 COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 176 CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 176 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................177 MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 177 IMAGE FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 177 MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 178 xvii HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 179 F SELF-TIMER .............................................................................................................. 180 MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 181 HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 184 FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 185 F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 186 DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 187 F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 187 F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 187 F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 188 F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 188 F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 189 ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 189 ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 189 WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE ................................................................................ 190 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 191 F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 191 TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 192 xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 193 F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 193 F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 193 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 193 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................194 F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 194 F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 194 F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 195 F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 195 F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 195 F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 195 F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 196 F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 196 INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 196 xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 196 F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY ................................................................................... 197 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 197 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 197 xviii Table of Contents AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................198 F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 198 F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 198 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 199 xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 199 xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 200 Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 200 F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 200 F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 201 F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 201 F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING ................................................... 201 F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 202 xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 202 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 202 xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 202 F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 203 FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 204 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................205 INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 205 EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 205 MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 206 MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 206 WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 206 LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 207 HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 207 MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ............................................................................................ 207 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 208 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................209 TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 209 START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 209 COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 210 DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 210 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 211 TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING .................................................................................. 211 xix 7 Playback and the Playback Menu 213 8 Network/USB Setting Menus 241 The Playback Display ....................................................................................214 The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 216 Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................218 Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 219 Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 219 The Playback Menu .......................................................................................220 SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 220 RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 221 HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 223 ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 224 SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 226 CROP .................................................................................................................................. 226 RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 227 PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 228 IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 229 VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 230 RATING .............................................................................................................................. 231 COPY .................................................................................................................................. 232 TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 233 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 235 DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK ........................................................................ 235 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 236 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 238 instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 239 DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 240 Overview ...........................................................................................................242 Supported Features .................................................................................................. 242 Connection Setting Profiles................................................................................. 246 xx Table of Contents Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)..............................................247 Installing Smartphone Apps ............................................................................... 247 Connecting to a Smartphone ............................................................................ 247 Using the Smartphone App ................................................................................ 249 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) .........................................................252 Copying Pictures to a Smartphone ................................................................ 252 Connecting the Camera and Computer ..................................................... 255 Using the Camera as a Webcam ...............................................................257 instax SHARE Printers ...................................................................................258 Establishing a Connection.................................................................................... 258 Printing Pictures .......................................................................................................... 259 Tethered Photography .................................................................................260 Tethered Photography via USB.......................................................................... 260 Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN ..................................................... 262 Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet)................................... 267 Uploading Files to Frame.io........................................................................270 Connecting via Wireless LAN .............................................................................. 270 Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) ........................................................... 272 Uploading Items to Frame.io .............................................................................. 275 Uploading Files via FTP ................................................................................278 Connecting to FTP Servers................................................................................... 278 Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers ................................ 285 Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers .................................................................. 288 RAW Processing ..............................................................................................291 Saving and Loading Settings .....................................................................292 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser ................................293 Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser ................................... 293 Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet .................... 303 The Remote Recording Display......................................................................... 306 Recording Movies Remotely ............................................................................... 310 Viewing Movies ........................................................................................................... 310 Saving and Loading Camera Settings ........................................................... 311 xxi Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................313 CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING............................................................ 313 SELECT CONNECTION SETTING ........................................................................ 318 AIRPLANE MODE ........................................................................................................ 319 Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING ................................................................. 320 instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING........................................................ 323 Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 323 FTP OPTIONAL SETTING......................................................................................... 326 USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .......................................................... 328 INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 329 RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING ........................................................................ 329 9 The Setup Menus 331 USER SETTING .................................................................................................332 FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 332 b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 333 DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 333 TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 334 Qa ............................................................................................................... 335 x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 335 F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 335 SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 336 BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 336 RESET ................................................................................................................................. 337 REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 337 SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................338 AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 338 SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 338 OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 339 F REC START/STOP VOLUME ............................................................................. 339 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 339 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 340 s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 340 s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 340 PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 341 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 341 xxii Table of Contents SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................342 VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 342 EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 342 EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 342 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 343 LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 344 LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 344 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 344 IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 345 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 345 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 346 NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 346 F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 347 ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 347 FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 347 AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 348 PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION ................................................................................ 348 FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 348 DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 349 EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION ................................................................ 349 DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 349 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 350 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 351 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 352 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 352 LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 353 SUB MONITOR SETTING ......................................................................................... 353 SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR .......................................................... 356 x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356 F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................357 FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 357 x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357 F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 358 COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 358 xxiii o S.S. OPERATION ................................................................................................... 359 COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 359 SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 359 SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 360 SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 360 SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 360 FOCUS RING .................................................................................................................. 361 FOCUS RING OPERATION ...................................................................................... 361 AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 361 AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 362 EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING ........................................................................ 362 a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ..................................................................................... 363 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 364 LOCK................................................................................................................................... 365 POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................366 AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 366 PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 367 SHOOTING STAND BY MODE .............................................................................. 368 AUTO POWER SAVE ................................................................................................... 368 AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 368 SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................369 FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 369 EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 370 x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 370 SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 370 SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 371 COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 371 DEFAULT CAPTION..................................................................................................... 372 IPTC ..................................................................................................................................... 372 GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 373 xxiv Table of Contents 10Shortcuts 375 11Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393 Shortcut Options ............................................................................................376 MY MENU ..........................................................................................................377 MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 377 The Quick Menu .............................................................................................379 The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 379 Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 381 Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 382 Function Controls...........................................................................................385 The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 385 Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 390 Lenses.................................................................................................................394 Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 394 Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 395 Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 395 Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 395 Aperture Rings ............................................................................................................. 396 T/S Lenses ....................................................................................................................... 396 Viewfinder Tilt Adapters ..............................................................................397 Attaching the EVF-TL1............................................................................................. 398 Using the EVF-TL1 ...................................................................................................... 399 External Flash Units .......................................................................................400 Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 401 SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 402 SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 403 COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 406 Vertical Battery Grips ....................................................................................410 Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip ................................................................. 411 Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 413 Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 415 Cooling Fans ....................................................................................................416 Attaching a Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 416 Using the Fan................................................................................................................ 418 xxv Table of Contents 12Technical Notes 419 Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................420 Software and Services for Use with Your Camera...............................423 Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 423 RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 423 Capture One Express for Fujifilm ...................................................................... 424 Capture One for Fujifilm ........................................................................................ 424 FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 424 FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 424 FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 425 FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner ........................................................................... 425 Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 425 For Your Safety ................................................................................................426 Product Care ....................................................................................................437 Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................438 Firmware Updates..........................................................................................439 Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 439 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................440 Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................452 Errors...................................................................................................................457 Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................460 Specifications ..................................................................................................461 xxvi Supplied Accessories The following are included with the camera: • NP-W235 rechargeable battery O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment. The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be sure to charge the battery before use (P 50). • AC-5VJ AC power adapter • Plug adapter • Interchangeable electronic viewfinder EVF-GFX3 • USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.) • Body cap (comes attached to camera) • Shoulder strap • Cable protector • Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe) • Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera) • Vertical battery grip connector cover (comes attached to camera) • Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera) O The EVF-GFX3 is for the GFX100 II only. N • The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region. • For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for Use with Your Camera” (P 423). xxvii About This Manual This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM GFX100 II digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its contents before proceeding. Symbols and Conventions The following symbols are used in this manual: O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the product. Additional information that may be helpful when using the N product. P Pages on which related information may be found. Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified, while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of camera described in this manual. Terminology The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The electronic viewfinder may be referred to as the “EVF” and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets are referred to as “smartphones”. xxviii Before You Begin 1 Parts of the Camera 1 Before You Begin A Secondary monitor backlight button.......31 B Fn4 button .....................................................385 C Secondary LCD monitor................................28 D Microphone ......................................................68 E Hot shoe .........................................................401 F Dial lock release .......................................60, 68 G Mode dial ............................................................7 H STILL/MOVIE mode switch .............................................................. 8, 60, 68 I Strap eyelet .......................................................40 J LAN connector cover K Connector cover L AF-assist illuminator...................................152 M N O Self-timer lamp ............................................164 Tally light ........................................................192 Sync terminal ................................................402 Lens signal contacts Lens release button ........................................41 P Fn6 button .....................................................385 Q Fn5 button .....................................................385 R Front command dial...............................9, 358 S ON/OFF switch .................................................54 T Shutter button .................................................62 U Fn1 button .....................................................385 V Fn2 button .....................................................385 W Fn3 button .....................................................385 X Hot shoe cover ..............................................401 Y Body cap............................................................41 Z LAN connector a Microphone/remote release connector (⌀3.5mm) ...............................................71, 85 b HDMI connector (Type A) .............................64 c USB connector (Type-C) ...............................50 d Hole to screw USB cable e Hole to screw cable protector O a Use of an optional RR-100 remote release requires a third-party adapter to convert the three-pin, ⌀2.5 mm connector to a threepin, ⌀3.5 mm connector. 2 Parts of the Camera 1 Before You Begin f DRIVE button......................................................8 g b (delete) button ...........................................66 h Focus mode selector ......................................93 i AFON button .........................................111, 385 j Rear command dial .......................9, 218, 358 k Q (quick menu) button ...............................379 l Indicator lamp ....................................... 10, 192 Tally light ........................................................192 t a (playback) button ...................................63 u Speaker .................................................... 73, 341 v MENU/OK button .............................................32 w AEL (exposure lock) button ..............111, 385 x Focus stick (focus lever)...................6, 98, 357 y Tripod mount z Vertical battery grip connector cover ....411 0 Tilt lock release ................................................11 1 LCD monitor .......................................11, 18, 20 m Headphone jack cover Touch screen .................................34, 162, 203 n Memory card slot cover latch......................45 o Memory card slot cover (detachable) 2 Headphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ......................207 ..................................................................... 6, 45 3 Memory card slot 1 (for Type B CFexpress cards)......................45 p Battery-chamber cover latch ......................43 q Hole to hook Vertical Battery Grip 4 Memory card slot 2 (for SD memory cards) ...............................45 r Battery-chamber cover .................................43 s DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 22, 216 3 1 Before You Begin 5 Battery latch ....................................................44 9 Hole to screw cooling fan..........................416 6 Battery chamber .............................................43 - Serial number plate..........................................6 7 Cooling fan connector cover ....................416 ^ Vertical battery grip connector................411 8 Cooling fan connector ...............................416 4 Parts of the Camera The Cable Protector Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection. A Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the cover passes through the slot in the protector. B Tighten the lock screw. C Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown. 1 Before You Begin 5 The Serial Number Plate Do not remove the serial number plate, which provides the CMIIT ID, serial number, and other important information. 1 Serial number plate Before You Begin The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable) The memory card slot cover can be removed by lowering the interior latch. Remove the cover for ease of access when a camera rig is attached or in other situations that make it difficult to open or close the cover. The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) Tilt or press the focus stick to select the focus area. The focus stick can also be used to navigate the menus. N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the center of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING. 6 Parts of the Camera The Mode Dial To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until the icon for the desired mode aligns with the index. 1 Description P Aperture and shutter speed can be ad76 justed using program shift. B S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE) Select for full control over camera set- 78 tings, including aperture (M and A) 80 and/or shutter speed (M and S). 82 A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE) M (MANUAL) C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6 (CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6) Take pictures using previously-stored 86 settings. O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. 7 Before You Begin Mode A P (PROGRAM AE) The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL to take photographs or to MOVIE to record movies. 1 Before You Begin The DRIVE Button Press the DRIVE button to adjust shooting settings. The options displayed vary with the position of the STILL/MOVIE mode switch. • Pressing the button when STILL is selected displays drive mode options. B J O W V BKT Mode Single frame High-speed burst Low-speed burst ISO BKT WHITE BALANCE BKT Bracketing P 76 117 117 113 113 114 Mode j Multiple exposure PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT q ACCURATE COLOR PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT r HIGH RESOLUTION + ACCURATE COLOR P 119 121 121 • Pressing the button when MOVIE is selected displays movie recording options. Option Frame size Aspect ratio Frame rate 8 Parts of the Camera The Command Dials Rotate or press the command dials to: Front command dial Rear command dial 1 • Select menu tabs or page through menus • Adjust aperture • View other pictures during 1, 2 playback Rotate • Switch Press between aperture and ISO sensitivity 2 • Press and hold to choose the option selected for D BUTTON/ DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING in the D (setup) menu tion of shutter speed and aperture (program shift) • Choose a shutter speed 1, 4 • Adjust exposure compensation by rotating the dial while pressing the function button to which EXPO. COMP. is assigned 1 • Adjust settings in the quick menu • Choose the size of the focus frame • Zoom in or out in full frame playback • Zoom in or out in multi-frame playback • Zoom in on the active focus point • Press and hold to choose the 3 manual focus mode focus display 3 • Zoom in on the active focus point during playback 1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 2 If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the aperture ring must be in the A or C position. 3 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button. 4 Only if a value other than auto is selected for shutter speed. N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION. 9 Before You Begin • Highlight menu items • Choose the desired combina- The Indicator Lamp Camera status is shown by the indicator lamp. 1 Before You Begin Indicator lamp Glows green Blinks green Blinks green and orange Glows orange Blinks orange Blinks red Camera status Focus locked. Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken. • Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for confirmation after being taken with option other than OFF selected for D SCREEN SETTING > IMAGE DISP. (additional pictures can be taken). • Camera off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. * Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at this time. Flash charging; flash will not fire when picture is taken. Lens or memory error. * Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload. N • Warnings may also appear in the display. • The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder. • The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. 10 Parts of the Camera The LCD Monitor The LCD monitor can be tilted for easier viewing, but be careful not to touch the wires or trap fingers or other objects behind the monitor. Touching the wires could cause camera malfunction. 1 “Tall” (Portrait) Orientation The display can also be tilted to take pictures from high or low angles when the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation. • Press the tilt lock release and tilt the display as shown in Figure 1. • To take high-angle shots, hold the camera in the orientation shown in Figure 2. Figure 1 Figure 2 11 Before You Begin N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for: • Touch photography (P 35) • Focus area selection (P 34) • Function selection (P 37) • Movie optimized control oL (P 36) • Playback (P 38) The Viewfinder 1 Before You Begin A Hot shoe .................................................397, 403 B Viewfinder lock releases ............................... 13 C VIEW MODE button......................................... 20 D Eye sensor ......................................................... 21 E Electronic viewfinder (EVF) ................... 16, 20 F Eye cup (lockable) .......................................... 14 G Diopter adjustment control ........................ 15 H Serial number plate I Connectors ....................................................... 13 J Hot shoe cover K Connector cover The EVF-TL1 The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel the viewfinder left or right ±45° or up or down between 0° and 90° (P 397). 12 The Viewfinder Attaching the Viewfinder Using the viewfinder makes it easier to frame your subject accurately. Remove the hot shoe cover from the camera and slide the viewfinder onto the hot shoe, stopping when it clicks into place. 1 Before You Begin Removing the Viewfinder Keeping the lock releases pressed (A), press down on the front of the viewfinder (B) and slide it off as shown. 13 The Eye Cup To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons on either side and slide eye cup up. 1 Before You Begin 14 The Viewfinder Focusing the Viewfinder If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put your eye to the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control until the display is in sharp focus. O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could cause product malfunction. 15 1 Before You Begin To focus the viewfinder: A Lift the diopter adjustment control. B Rotate the control to adjust viewfinder focus. C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place. Camera Displays This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during shooting. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. The Electronic Viewfinder 1 C Before You Begin F E F D QR G N O P UV ST Y Z e f b WX c d E a 2023.12.31 12:10 HI J KLM D h i G C B A 9 j k l m 8 7 6 5 g n zy v ut s r q po 4 3 21 0 x w A Movie format/crop factor .........................185 C Movie compression .....................................182 B IS mode 2 .........................................................172 D Focus check ..........................................104, 159 16 Camera Displays elapsed recording time ..............................68 b Card slot options ................................... 47, 370 c SSD connection status ..................................49 d Number of available frames 1...................460 e Image size ......................................................126 f File format......................................................182 g Image quality................................................127 h HEIF format ...................................................129 i Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 j Touch screen mode .............................. 34, 162 k Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193 l Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456 m Control lock 3 .................................................365 n Boost mode ...................................................367 o Power supply....................................................52 p Histogram .........................................................26 q Battery level ......................................................55 r Sensitivity .......................................................106 s Exposure compensation ............................109 t Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82 u Distance indicator 2 .....................................103 v Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82 w TTL lock ..................................................175, 389 x AE lock....................................................111, 361 y Metering .........................................................108 z Shooting mode ...............................................76 0 Focus mode 2 ....................................................93 1 Focus indicator 2 ..............................................94 2 Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 93, 101 3 AF lock....................................................111, 361 4 Shift amount/rotate amount...................396 5 Time code.......................................................209 6 Microphone input channel.......................208 7 Recording level 2 ...........................................205 8 Exposure indicator................................ 82, 109 9 Virtual horizon.................................................27 A Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110 B Location data download status..............373 C Frame.io connection status ......................274 D Image transfer status ........................247, 313 E FTP upload progress ...................................278 F Frame.io upload progress..........................270 G Remote recording function .......................293 1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF). 3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button. Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again. 17 1 Before You Begin E Depth-of-field preview........................ 81, 103 F Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................184 G 35mm format mode ...................................172 H Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403 I Flash compensation ...................................403 J Self-timer indicator .....................................164 K Continuous mode........................................117 L Shutter type ...................................................170 M AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157 N Bluetooth ON/OFF O Wireless connection P Ethernet connection Q White balance ..............................................136 R AWB lock ........................................................362 S Film simulation ............................................130 T F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186 U Dynamic range ............................................134 V D-range priority ...........................................135 W Bluetooth host ..............................................247 X AirGlu BT connection ..................................211 Y Movie mode ........................................... 68, 178 Z High-speed recording indicator ..............179 a Recording time available/ The LCD Monitor E B C D G H F M I JK A 1 N O L R S U P V W Y Z Q T X a b Before You Begin 70 ' ' & c d % $ \ e f g ^ - h i j 9 8 7 6 k l m n 1 0 5 4 3 2 x zy ut s r w A Movie format/crop factor .........................185 B Bluetooth ON/OFF C Wireless connection D Ethernet connection E Movie compression .....................................182 F Focus check ..........................................104, 159 G Depth-of-field preview........................ 81, 103 H Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................184 18 q p o v I 35mm format mode ...................................172 J Bluetooth host ..............................................247 K AirGlu BT connection ..................................211 L Location data download status..............373 M Movie mode ........................................... 68, 178 N High-speed recording indicator ..............179 O Image transfer status ........................247, 313 P FTP upload progress ...................................278 Camera Displays 1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames. 2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). 3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls. 4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button. Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again. 19 1 Before You Begin Q Frame.io upload progress..........................270 r Virtual horizon.................................................27 R Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110 s Exposure compensation ............................109 S Recording time available/ t Distance indicator 2 .....................................103 elapsed recording time ..............................68 u Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82 T Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 v Shift amount/rotate amount...................396 U Card slot options ................................... 47, 370 w Time code.......................................................209 V SSD connection status ..................................49 x Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82 W Number of available frames 1...................460 y TTL lock ..................................................175, 389 X Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193 z AE lock....................................................111, 361 Y Image size ......................................................126 0 Metering .........................................................108 Z File format......................................................182 1 Shooting mode ...............................................76 a Image quality................................................127 2 Focus mode 2 ....................................................93 b HEIF format ...................................................129 3 Focus indicator 2 ..............................................94 c Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 34, 162 4 Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 93, 101 d AWB lock ........................................................362 5 AF lock....................................................111, 361 e White balance ..............................................136 6 AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157 f Film simulation ............................................130 7 Microphone input channel.......................208 g F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186 8 Shutter type ...................................................170 h Dynamic range ............................................134 9 Recording level 2 ...........................................205 i D-range priority ...........................................135 A Continuous mode........................................117 j Movie optimized control 3 ............................36 B Self-timer indicator .....................................164 k Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456 C Remote recording function .......................293 l Control lock 4 .................................................365 D Frame.io connection status ......................274 m Boost mode ...................................................367 E Exposure indicator................................ 82, 109 n Power supply....................................................52 F Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403 o Battery level ......................................................55 G Flash compensation ...................................403 p Histogram .........................................................26 H IS mode 2 .........................................................172 q Sensitivity .......................................................106 Choosing a Display Mode Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle through the following display modes. You can choose separate display modes for shooting and playback. 1 Before You Begin N Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu to choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor. SHOOTING Option Description Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns E EYE SENSOR the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on. LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfinder off. EVF ONLY Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off. Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder on; taking it away turns the viewfinder off. The LCD EVF ONLY + E monitor remains off. Putting your eye to the viewfinder during shooting turns the viewfinder on, but the LCD monitor is used for the display of images once you remove your eye from E EYE SENSOR + LCD the viewfinder after shooting. The options selected for IMAGE DISP. D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display in the LCD monitor. This setting cannot be selected while shooting movies. N Go to D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING > SHOOTING in the setup menu and press the Q button to choose the view modes available. 20 Camera Displays PLAYBACK Option E EYE SENSOR LCD ONLY EVF ONLY Description Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on. LCD monitor on, viewfinder off. Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off. 1 Before You Begin The Eye Sensor • The eye sensor may respond to objects other than your eye or to light shining directly on the sensor. • The eye sensor is not available when the LCD monitor is tilted. Eye sensor 21 Adjusting Display Brightness The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu. Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do the same for the LCD monitor. 1 Before You Begin Display Rotation When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor automatically rotate to match camera orientation. The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor. N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfinder while using the DISP/BACK button. 22 Camera Displays Viewfinder Full screen Full screen (no indicators) 1 Before You Begin Standard indicators Standard (no indicators) Dual display N The dual display is available only when shooting still images with manual focus. 23 LCD Monitor Standard indicators Standard (no indicators) Dual display Info display 1 Before You Begin N The dual display is available only during manual focus. The Dual Display The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a smaller close-up of the focus area. 24 Camera Displays Customizing the Standard Display To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display: Display standard indicators. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. 2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING. Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the setup menu. 3 Choose items. Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. • FRAMING GUIDELINE • FOCUS FRAME • FOCUS INDICATOR • AF DISTANCE INDICATOR • MF DISTANCE INDICATOR • HISTOGRAM • LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT • SHOOTING MODE • APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO • INFORMATION BACKGROUND • Expo. Comp. (Digit) • Expo. Comp. (Scale) • FOCUS MODE • PHOTOMETRY • SHUTTER TYPE • FLASH • CONTINUOUS MODE • DUAL IS MODE • TOUCH SCREEN MODE 4 5 • WHITE BALANCE • FILM SIMULATION • DYNAMIC RANGE • BOOST MODE • SHIFT AMOUNT OF T/S LENS • ROTATE AMOUNT OF T/S LENS • COOLING FAN SETTING • FRAMES REMAINING • IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY • MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME • 35mm FORMAT MODE • COMMUNICATION STATUS • MIC LEVEL • GUIDANCE MESSAGE • NO STORAGE MEDIA WARNING • DATE/TIME • BATTERY LEVEL • FRAMING OUTLINE Press DISP/BACK to save changes. Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the shooting display. 25 1 Before You Begin 1 Framing Outline Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see against dark backgrounds. Histograms Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis. 1 Number of pixels Before You Begin Shadows Highlights Pixel brightness • Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve throughout the tone range. • Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of the graph. • Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of the graph. To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will be overexposed at current settings superimposed on the view through the lens, press the function button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned (P 358, 385). A Overexposed areas blink B RGB histograms 26 A B Camera Displays Virtual Horizon Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be chosen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING. Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on a tripod or the like. 2D 3D 1 Before You Begin Pitch Roll • OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed. • 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level. The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back. • 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or right and forward or back. N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays. 27 The Secondary LCD Monitor Among the settings that can be viewed in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Different settings are displayed in still photography and movie modes. 1 Before You Begin Secondary LCD monitor Default Settings By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings listed below. N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR SETTING. Still Photography Mode A BC D E F G K J A B C D E F SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE ISO SHOOTING MODE IMAGE SIZE WHITE BALANCE I H Default G FILM SIMULATION H BATTERY LEVEL I FRAMES REM. J CARD SLOT OPTIONS K d Scale N BATTERY LEVEL, FRAMES REM., and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot be changed in the settings. 28 Camera Displays Movie Mode ABC D E M 1 F A B C D E F G K JIH SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE ISO MOVIE MODE BATTERY LEVEL REMAINING TIME TIME CODE Before You Begin L G Default H FILM SIMULATION I WHITE BALANCE J MOVIE FORMAT K SHOOTING MODE L CARD SLOT OPTIONS M Expo.Comp. & MIC LEVEL N MOVIE MODE, BATTERY LEVEL, and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot be changed in the settings. Checking the functions assigned to function buttons The functions assigned to the Fn1, Fn2, and Fn3 buttons in D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can be checked on the secondary LCD monitor. A B C A B C Fn1 button Fn2 button Fn3 button 29 Cycling Through Indicators in the Secondary LCD Monitor The indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor change each time the secondary LCD monitor mode button is pressed. 1 Before You Begin INFORMATION * DIALS HISTOGRAM * Displays movie information in movie mode. 30 Camera Displays The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button To turn on the secondary LCD monitor backlight when you find the secondary LCD monitor too dark to read, press the secondary monitor backlight button. Press the button again to turn the backlight off. 31 1 Before You Begin Background Color The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is displayed in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on. Using the Menus To display the menus, press MENU/OK. 1 Before You Begin The Menus Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie recording, and playback. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT Shooting STILL/MOVIE mode switch set to STILL EXIT MOVIE SETTING MOVIE SETTING LIST IMAGE FORMAT MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC SELF-TIMER MEDIA REC SETTING HDMI OUTPUT SETTING FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION STILL/MOVIE mode switch set to MOVIE EXIT PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ERASE Playback SIMULTANEOUS DELETE CROP RESIZE PROTECT During playback 32 EXIT Using the Menus Selecting a Menu Tab To navigate the menus: 1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus. 1 Before You Begin IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT EXIT 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left to highlight the tab for the current menu. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT EXIT Tab 3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab containing the desired item. 4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu. N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items. 33 Touch Screen Mode The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen. 1 Before You Begin Shooting Touch Controls To enable touch controls, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS TOUCH SCREEN SETTING DOUBLE TAP SETTING ON TOUCH FUNCTION TOUCH SCREENOFF SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS EVF The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pictures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the monitor employed for touch controls. N You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferentially focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. 34 Touch Screen Mode LCD Monitor The operation performed can be selected by tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display. Touch controls can be used for the following operations: 1 Description • In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your AF AF OFF subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AF OFF icon. • In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AF OFF icon. • In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. AREA Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. OFF Touch screen mode off. O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode. • Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 163). N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se- lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. • Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during movie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 203)”. 35 Before You Begin Mode 1 Before You Begin MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING > MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or tapping the movie-optimized mode button in the shooting display optimizes the command dials and touch controls for movie recording. This can be used to prevent camera sounds being recorded with movie footage. • SHUTTER SPEED • APERTURE • EXPOSURE COMPENSATION • F ISO • INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Movie-optimized mode button • WIND FILTER • HEADPHONES VOLUME • F FILM SIMULATION • F WHITE BALANCE • F IS MODE • F IS MODE BOOST N • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring. • When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control. • EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT can be set only when an external mic is connected. 36 Touch Screen Mode Touch Function Functions can be assigned to the following flick gestures in much the same way as function buttons (P 385): • Flick up: T-Fn1 • Flick left: T-Fn2 • Flick right: T-Fn3 • Flick down: T-Fn4 INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT L tures display a menu; tap to select the desired option. R 0 -6 -12 -20 25.5 -40 -50 dB SET CANCEL • Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION. 37 Before You Begin N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges- 1 Touch Screen Mode Playback Touch Controls When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls can be used for the following playback operations: • Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to 1 view other images. Before You Begin • Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display and spread them apart to zoom in. • Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display and slide them together to zoom out. N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no further. • Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in on the focus point. • Drag: View other areas of the image during playback zoom. 38 First Steps 39 Attaching the Strap Attach the strap. Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below. 2 First Steps O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured. 40 Attaching a Lens The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM G-mount. Remove the body cap from the camera and the rear cap from the lens. Place the lens on mount, keeping the marks on the lens and camera aligned (A), and then slowly rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place (B). 2 Removing Lenses To remove the lens, turn the camera off, then press the lens release button (A) and slowly rotate the lens as shown (B). O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens or inside the camera, replace the lens caps and camera body cap when the lens is not attached. Lenses and Other Optional Accessories The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM G-mount. 41 First Steps O • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the camera. • Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts. • Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place. • Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens. Attaching a Lens O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (exchanging) lenses. • Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter. • Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to malfunction. • Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses. • Do not rotate the lens while holding moving parts of the camera, such as the aperture ring. • See the manual provided with the lens for information on use. 2 First Steps 42 Inserting the Battery Insert the battery in the camera as described below. 1 Open the battery-chamber cover. Slide the battery-chamber cover latch as shown and open the battery-chamber cover. O • Do not open the battery-chamber cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could damage image files or memory cards. • Do not use excessive force when handling the battery-chamber cover. First Steps 2 2 Insert the battery as shown. O • Insert the battery in the orientation shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. • Confirm that the battery is securely latched. 43 Inserting the Battery 3 Close the battery-chamber cover. Close and latch the cover. O If the cover does not close, check that the battery is in the correct orientation. Do not attempt to force the cover shut. 2 First Steps Removing the Battery Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. To remove the battery, press the battery latch to the side, and slide the battery out of the camera as shown. O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environments. Observe caution when removing the battery. 44 Inserting Memory Cards Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately). N The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards. 1 Open the memory card slot cover. Unlatch and open the cover. 2 memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. 2 Insert the memory card. Holding the card in the orientation shown, slide it in until it clicks into place at the back of the slot. Close and latch the memory card slot cover. O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle or use force. 45 First Steps O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the Removing Memory Cards Turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a finger and then slowly releasing it; the card can then be removed by hand. O • Press the center of the card. • Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly. 2 First Steps • If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it. 46 Inserting Memory Cards Using Two Cards The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the second slot only when the card in the first slot is full. This can be changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING. Option BACKUP Display 2 First Steps Description The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the first slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE SEQUENTIAL DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL), (default) recording will start on the card in the second slot and switch to the first slot when the card in the second slot is full. Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card. RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the first slot and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This setting takes effect only when SUPER RAW+JPEG SEPARATE FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW, or NORMAL+RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY. RAW+HEIF The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING. 47 2 First Steps Compatible Memory Cards • The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, and CFexpress Type B memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces are supported. • CFexpress or UHS-II memory cards are recommended for highspeed burst photography. • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the settings selected (P 72). • A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm website. For details, visit: https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/. O • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo- ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. • Memory cards can be locked, making it impossible to format the card or to record or delete images. Before inserting a memory card, slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. • Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance immediately. • miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the camera to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove the card. • Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels can cause camera malfunction. • Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card. • Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device to edit, delete, or rename image files. Always use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming files, copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the originals. Renaming the files on the camera can cause problems during playback. 48 Inserting Memory Cards Using an external SSD in place of a memory card This camera can save still images and movies to an SSD. If an SSD is connected to the USB connector, an icon appears on the screen, and the recording destination is switched to the SSD automatically. To record to a memory card, turn off the camera, and then remove the SSD. N Even when an SSD is connected, you can select the SSD or a memory 2 First Steps card for playback by C PLAY BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT. 49 Charging the Battery For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment. The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before charging the battery, turn the camera off. O • An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera. • Charging takes about 180 minutes. 2 1 First Steps Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter. Attach the plug adapter as shown, making sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into place on the AC power adapter terminals. O • The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu- sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter. Do not use it with other devices. • The shape of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale. 2 Charge the battery. Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into an indoor power outlet. O • Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C). • Be sure the connectors are fully inserted. 50 Charging the Battery Charge Status The indicator lamp shows battery charge status as follows: Indicator lamp Battery status On Battery charging Off Charging complete Blinks Charging error 2 First Steps 51 O • The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of 100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use). • Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as this could cause malfunction. • Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from the camera. • Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat. • Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”. • Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in product malfunction. • Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel the outer casing. • The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the battery one or two days before use. • If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its charging life and must be replaced. • Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not in use. • If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may find that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge the battery regularly. • Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging. • Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures. • Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on the battery. 2 First Steps N • If the camera is turned on during charging, charging will end and the USB connection will instead be used to power the camera. The battery level will begin to gradually decline (P 328). • The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB. 52 Charging the Battery Charging via Computer The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface. 2 First Steps Leave the computer on during charging. The battery will not charge while the camera is on. O• • Connect the supplied USB cable. • Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. • Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable. • Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computer’s current state. • The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input of 5 V/500 mA. 53 Turning the Camera On and Off Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off. Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera on, or to OFF to turn the camera off. 2 O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect pic- First Steps tures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinder clean. N • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback. • Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode. • The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT > AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF switch to OFF and then back to ON. 54 Checking the Battery Level After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the display. Battery level is shown as follows: 2 Description Battery partially discharged. Battery about 80% full. Battery about 60% full. Battery about 40% full. Battery about 20% full. First Steps Indicator e f g h i i (red) j (blinks red) Low battery. Charge as soon as possible. Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery. 55 Basic Setup When you turn the camera on for the first time, you can choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the steps below when turning the camera on for the first time. 1 Turn the camera on. A language-selection dialog will be displayed. 2 Choose a language. Highlight a language and press MENU/OK. 3 Choose a time zone. When prompted, choose a time zone and turn daylight savings time on or off using the focus stick (focus lever), then highlight SET and press MENU/OK. 2 First Steps AREA SETTING BERLIN/PARIS AREA SETTING GMT ±0:00 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SET OFF NO N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK. 56 Basic Setup 4 Set the clock. DATE/TIME GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS 2023 . 12 . 31 12 00 AM 12h SET 5 2 First Steps View information on the smartphone app. APPLICATION • The camera will display a QR code you can scan with your smartphone IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED TO THE SMARTPHONE. to open a website where you can download the smartphone app. • Press MENU/OK to proceed to the next step. NO SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP. SET N Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera or control the camera remotely (P 247). 6 Choose an AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. • The selected setting determines the temperature at which the camera will turn off automatically. • Press MENU/OK to exit to the shooting display. AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. STANDARD HIGH SET THE "AUTO POWER OFF TEMP." TO "HIGH" TO EXTEND THE RECORDING TIME. ONLY RECOMMENDED WHEN NOT HANDHELD OR WHEN USING TRIPOD ETC. SET 7 Format the memory card (P 332). O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all memory cards after using them in a computer or other device. N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the camera is turned on. 57 Basic Setup Choosing a Different Language To change the language: 2 1 Display language options. Select D USER SETTING > Qa. 2 Choose a language. Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Changing the Time and Date To set the camera clock: First Steps 1 Display DATE/TIME options. Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME. 2 Set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock. 58 Basic Photography and Playback 59 Taking Photographs (Mode P) This section describes how to take pictures using program AE (mode P). See pages 76–85 for information on S, A, and M modes. 3 Basic Photography and Playback 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL. 2 Rotate the focus mode selector to S. 3 Rotate the mode dial to P. O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. 4 60 Confirm that P appears in the display. Taking Photographs (Mode P) 5 Ready the camera. • Hold the camera steady with both hands and brace your elbows against your sides. Shaking or unsteady hands can blur your shots. • To prevent pictures that are out of focus or too dark (underexposed), keep your fingers and other objects away from the lens and AF-assist illuminator. Basic Photography and Playback 6 3 Frame the picture. Lenses with Zoom Rings Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom out, right to zoom in. 61 Taking Photographs (Mode P) 7 Focus. Press the shutter button halfway to set focus and exposure. Focus indicator Focus frame • If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator will glow green. • If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s 3 will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white. Basic Photography and Playback N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to assist the focus operation. • Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock). • The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro and standard focus ranges for the lens. 8 62 Shoot. Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture. Viewing Pictures Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor. To view pictures full frame, press a. 100-0001 N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”) icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback zoom may not be available. Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT option. 63 3 Basic Photography and Playback Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame. HDMI Output Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI devices. Connecting to HDMI Devices Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a third-party HDMI cable. 1 2 Turn the camera off. Connect the cable as shown below. 3 Basic Photography and Playback Insert into HDMI connector Insert into HDMI connector (Type A) 3 Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the documentation supplied with the device. 4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off in playback mode (P 65). O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted. • Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long. 64 Viewing Pictures Shooting Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an external recorder that supports HDMI input. Playback To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera monitor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect on sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to adjust the volume. N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie playback begins. 3 Basic Photography and Playback 65 Deleting Pictures Use the b button to delete pictures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. 1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and select FRAME. ERASE FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES 3 Basic Photography and Playback 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures. N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any pictures you wish to delete (P 228). • Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK MENU > ERASE option (P 224). 66 Movie Recording and Playback 67 Recording Movies This section describes how to film movies in auto mode. 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to MOVIE. 2 Rotate the mode dial to P. 4 Movie Recording and Playback AUTO will appear in the display. O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. 68 Recording Movies 3 Press the shutter button all the way down. Recording will start. • A recording indicator (V) is displayed while recording is in progress. • The borders of the display turn Recording time red during movie recording, green Time remaining during high-speed recording. • The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while another display counts up to show the recording time. 4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full. made by the camera during recording. • Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 69 Movie Recording and Playback O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording. • Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds 4 N • To maximize recording time: - keep the camera out of direct sunlight as much as possible, and - turn the camera off any time it is not in use. • The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp— indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom using the zoom ring on the lens (if available). • To prevent the borders of the display changing color during movie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING > F REC FRAME INDICATOR. • While recording is in progress, you can: - Adjust sensitivity - Refocus using any of the following methods: • Press the shutter button halfway • Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned • Use touch screen controls - Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button to which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been assigned • Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases settings may not apply during recording. • To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial (P 97). 4 Movie Recording and Playback 70 Recording Movies Temperature Warnings The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed, image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before turning it on again. Using an External Microphone Sound can be recorded with external microphones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in diameter; microphones that require plug-in power cannot be used. See the microphone manual for details. XLR Microphone Adapters The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website. https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website 4 Movie Recording and Playback 71 Recording Movies 4 Movie Recording and Playback Adjusting Movie Settings • Pressing MENU/OK when MOVIE is selected with the STILL/MOVIE mode switch displays the movie menu. • Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted using MOVIE MODE. • Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file type, bit rate, and the destination card slot. • Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector. Regardless of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch to focus mode C (continuous AF) when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choosing focus mode M when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection. type of memory card supported varies with the option select for O • The B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING. - Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards. Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better. Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better. Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better. Depth of Field Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be adjusted when the mode dial is set to A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual). 72 Viewing Movies View movies on the camera. Any movie selected after the a button is pressed to begin playback will be indicated by a W icon. Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to start movie playback. PLAY AUDIO SET. +1.0 12800 The following operations can be performed while a movie is displayed: 4 Left/right View other pictures Playback in progress ((x x) Playback paused (y (y) End playback Pause playback Adjust speed Start/resume playback Single frame rewind/ advance Progress is shown in the display during playback. STOP PAUSE 73 Movie Recording and Playback Focus stick (focus lever) Full-frame playback View photo Up information Down Start playback Viewing Movies O Do not cover the speaker during playback. N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME. • To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the camera monitor, press the a button (P 64). Playback Speed Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to adjust playback speed during playback. Speed is shown by the number of arrows (M or N). 4 Arrows Movie Recording and Playback 74 29m59s Taking Photographs 75 P, S, A, and M Modes P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture. Mode P: Program AE Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be selected with program shift. 5 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL. 2 Rotate the mode dial to P. Taking Photographs P will appear in the display. O • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”. • Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. 76 P, S, A, and M Modes Program Shift If desired, you can rotate the front command dial to select other combinations of shutter speed and aperture without altering exposure (program shift). Aperture Shutter speed O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances: • When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION SETTING • When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > DYNAMIC RANGE • In movie mode N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off. 5 Taking Photographs 77 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for optimal exposure. 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL. 2 Rotate the mode dial to S. 5 Taking Photographs S will appear in the display. 3 78 Rotate the rear command dial to choose the shutter speed. P, S, A, and M Modes O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter speed, aperture will be displayed in red. • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aperture display will show “– – –”. • Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. N • Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. • At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in progress. • To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. • The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended. 5 Taking Photographs 79 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for optimal exposure. 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL. 2 Rotate the mode dial to A. 5 Taking Photographs A will appear in the display. 3 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture. N • If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial on the camera. • If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture when the aperture ring is rotated to A or C. • The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING. 80 P, S, A, and M Modes O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture, shutter speed will be displayed in red. • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter speed display will show “– – –”. • Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial. N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Previewing Depth of Field When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned to a function button, pressing the button displays a L icon and stops aperture down to the selected setting, allowing depth of field to be previewed in the display. 5 Taking Photographs 81 Mode M: Manual Exposure In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture. Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed (darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative expression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached. 1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL. 2 Rotate the mode dial to M. 5 Taking Photographs M will appear in the display. 82 P, S, A, and M Modes 3 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a shutter speed and the lens aperture ring to choose the aperture. N • The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator that shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. • If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial on the camera. • If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperture when the aperture ring is rotated to A or C. • The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING. O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release BULB Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure. 1 Set shutter speed to BULB. 83 Taking Photographs the dial. 5 2 Press the shutter button all the way down. • The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the shutter button is pressed. • The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure started. • Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display the processing time remaining. O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL IMAGE or multiple exposure or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE. N To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting. 5 Taking Photographs 84 P, S, A, and M Modes Using a Remote Release A remote release can be used for long time-exposures. When using an optional RR-100 remote release or an electronic release from third-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s microphone/remote release connector via a third-party ⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter. NA confirmation dialog will be displayed when a remote release is connected; press MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/ REMOTE RELEASE. CHECK MIC/REMOTE RELEASE SETTING SKIP SET Exposure Preview To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE. 5 or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken. 85 Taking Photographs N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash Custom Modes Rotate the mode dial to any of modes C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C6 (CUSTOM 6) to take pictures using previously-saved shooting menu settings. Saving Current Settings Save current settings in a custom settings bank. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 5 2 Taking Photographs Highlight a destination bank for current settings (C1 through C6) and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 EXIT 3 Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME EXIT 86 P, S, A, and M Modes 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. Current settings will be saved to the selected bank. SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS CUSTOM 1 SAVE THE CHANGES OK? OK CANCEL Editing Custom Settings Edit existing custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 5 CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 EXIT 3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME EXIT 87 Taking Photographs CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 4 The camera will display a list of shooting menu items; highlight an item you wish to edit and press MENU/OK. Adjust the selected item as desired. CUSTOM 1 SHOOTING MODE SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXP. COMPENSATION DRIVE MODE EXIT 5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting menu list. Adjust additional items as desired. N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the changes will not be saved automatically. • To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the list and press Q. • To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings, select RESET THE CHANGES. • If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied with the changes intact. 5 Taking Photographs Copying Custom Settings Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been renamed, the name will also be copied to the destination bank. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/ SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 88 P, S, A, and M Modes 2 Highlight the source bank and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 EXIT 3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME EXIT 4 Highlight the destination bank (C1 through C6) and press MENU/OK. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. COPY TO CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 N Any changes to custom settings in the 5 CUSTOM 6 5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The selected settings will be copied to the destination bank, overwriting any existing settings. Taking Photographs destination bank will be overwritten. COPY CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 COPY OK? OK CANCEL 89 Resetting Custom Settings Reset selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography. To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 EXIT 3 5 Taking Photographs Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING and press MENU/OK. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK SAVE THE CHANGES RESET THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME EXIT 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The selected bank will be reset. RESET CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK? RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT OK CANCEL 90 P, S, A, and M Modes Renaming Custom Settings Banks Rename selected custom settings banks. 1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK. N This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photography. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING. 2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK. EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 EXIT 3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1 SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS EDIT/CHECK 5 SAVE THE CHANGES COPY RESET CUSTOM SETTING EDIT CUSTOM NAME EXIT 4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select SET. The selected bank will be renamed. 91 Taking Photographs RESET THE CHANGES Autofocus Take pictures using autofocus. 1 Rotate the focus mode selector to S or C (P 93). 2 3 Use G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE to choose an AF mode (P 95). Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA and choose the position and size of the focus frame (P 97). 4 Take pictures. 5 Taking Photographs 92 Autofocus Focus Mode Use the focus mode selector to choose how the camera focuses. Choose from the following options: Mode S (AF-S) C (AF-C) M (manual) Description Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choose for stationary subjects. Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to reflect changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion. Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (P 101). justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button is not pressed. 93 Taking Photographs N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. • If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad- 5 The Focus Indicator Focus status is shown by the focus indicator. Focus indicator 5 Focus indicator ( ) z (lights green) (z) (lights green) A (blinks white) j Taking Photographs 94 Focus status Camera focusing. Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S). Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject. Camera unable to focus. Manual focus (focus mode M). Autofocus Autofocus Options (AF Mode) Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes. 1 2 3 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE. Choose an AF mode. How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode. Focus Mode S (AF-S) Option Description Sample image Camera focuses on subject in selected focus point. Use for pinSINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject. r z WIDE j ALL Taking Photographs y ZONE 5 Camera focuses on subject in selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects in motion. Camera focuses automatically on high-contrast subjects; display shows areas in focus. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING. 95 Focus Mode C (AF-C) Option Description Sample image Focus tracks subject at selected focus point. Use for subjects moving SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera. r y ZONE z 5 Taking Photographs TRACKING j ALL 96 Camera tracks focus in selected focus zone. Use for subjects that are moving fairly predictably. Focus tracks subjects moving through wide area of frame. Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING. Autofocus Focus-Point Selection Choose a focus point for autofocus. Viewing the Focus-Point Display 1 2 3 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu. Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the focus-point display. Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to choose a focus area. N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 34). 5 Taking Photographs 97 Selecting a Focus Point Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the focus point and the rear command dial to choose the size of the focus frame. The procedure varies with the option selected for AF mode. Focus stick Rear command dial AF mode Tilt Press Select focus point Select center focus point r y 5 Taking Photographs z Rotate Press Choose from 6 Restore original frame sizes size — N • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING is selected in focus mode S. • You can also press the DISP/BACK button to return the focus area to the center. 98 Autofocus The Focus-Point Display The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF mode. N • Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large squares. • The dimensions of ZONE CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, and ZONE CUSTOM 3 can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING > ZONE CUSTOM SETTING. r SINGLE POINT points availselected using SETTING > OF FOCUS z WIDE/TRACKING Choose from zones with Position focus frame over 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track points or from ZONE using continuous AF. CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, and ZONE CUSTOM 3. Autofocus Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be unable to focus on the subjects listed below. • Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies. • Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object. • Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as hair or fur. • Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame. • Subjects that show little contrast with the background. • Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a backdrop of highly contrasting elements). 99 5 Taking Photographs Number of able can be G AF/MF NUMBER POINTS. AF mode y ZONE Autofocus Checking Focus To zoom in on the current focus area for precise focus, press the center of the rear command dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. Press the center of the rear command dial again to cancel zoom. Normal display 5 Focus zoom N • In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. • The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in Taking Photographs effect. • In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE. • Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF is on. D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to change the function performed by the center of the rear command dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 385). • Use 100 Manual Focus Adjust focus manually. 1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M. j will appear in the display. Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce the focus distance, right to increase. 3 Take pictures. 5 Taking Photographs 2 N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS RING to reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring. • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when the lens is in manual focus mode. 101 Quick Focus • To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial). • In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a chosen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING. 5 Taking Photographs 102 Manual Focus Checking Focus A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual focus mode. The Manual Focus Indicator The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu), the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance in front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus. Focus distance (white line) Depth of field 5 are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depthof-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators. • Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to help you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. 103 Taking Photographs N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR Focus Zoom If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, the camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear command dial to exit zoom. N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area. • Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can- not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist. MF Assist Use G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST (P 158) in the photo menus or G AF/MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST (P 201) in the movie menus to choose a focus check option. 5 N The focus check options for movies differ from those for still photography. Taking Photographs • DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of the split image are correctly aligned. • DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when the subject is in focus. 104 Manual Focus • FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con- trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until the subject is highlighted. • FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below the focus point indicating whether focus is in front of or behind the subject. The needle swings left when focus is in front of the subject and right when it is behind the subject. Adjust focus so the needle is pointing straight up. N The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS RING. • FOCUS N • You can change the indicator colors to monochrome using G AF/ MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST in the movie menus. With this setting, a white indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus position, and a black indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus position. • Indicators may not be displayed for subjects that are difficult to capture with auto focus (P 99). 105 5 Taking Photographs MAP: Square indicators are displayed in focus frames to indicate points that are in focus and not in focus by color. A green indicator is displayed on a point in focus on the subject and a point the same distance as the subject. A yellow indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus position, and a blue indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus position. Sensitivity Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light. Sensitivity settings can be displayed by pressing the Fn button to which sensitivity is assigned. Option Description Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shootAUTO1 ing conditions according to combination of standard and AUTO2 maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed choAUTO3 sen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 107). Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in dis80–12800 play. L (40) Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may apH (25600/51200/102400) pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range. 5 Taking Photographs N • Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off. • If desired, you can use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING to configure the camera so that ISO sensitivity can be adjusted using the front or rear command dial. Adjusting Sensitivity High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note, however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities. 106 Sensitivity AUTO Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3. Item Options DEFAULT SENSITIVITY 80–12800 MAX. SENSITIVITY 200–12800 MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ¼–30 SEC, AUTO AUTO1 800 Default AUTO2 80 1600 AUTO AUTO3 3200 The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the default and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED. N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that 107 5 Taking Photographs selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. • The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY. • If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will automatically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image stabilization is on or off ). Metering Choose how the camera meters exposure. A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of the following metering options: O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/ EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the G AF/MF SETTING menu. Mode o MULTI p CENTERWEIGHTED 5 v Taking Photographs SPOT w AVERAGE Description The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recommended in most situations. The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the area at the center. The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and in other cases in which the background is much brighter or darker than the main subject. Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same lighting, and is particularly effective for landscapes and portraits of subjects dressed in black or white. N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/ MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 159). 108 Exposure Compensation Adjust exposure. Hold the Fn button to which exposure compensation is assigned and rotate the rear command dial to select the desired value. N The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/ DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING. O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode. • Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display, although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if: the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV, W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY. - 109 5 Taking Photographs Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the display may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensation during F-Log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for F DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly. Focus/Exposure Lock Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed halfway. 1 Position the subject in the focus frame and press the shutter button halfway to lock focus and exposure. Focus and exposure will remain locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway (AF/AE lock). 2 Press the button all the way down. N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF, SHUTTER AE. 5 Taking Photographs 110 Focus/Exposure Lock Other Controls Focus and exposure can also be locked using the AEL and AFON buttons. At default settings, you can use the AEL button to lock exposure without locking focus. If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock focus without locking exposure. AEL button (exposure lock) • While the assigned control is pressed, pressing the shutter button halfway will not end the lock. • If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/ AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be ended by pressing the control a second time. AFON button 5 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 387). 111 Taking Photographs N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point during exposure lock. • The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using Bracketing Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures. 1 Press the DRIVE button to display drive mode options. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight one of the following: Option W ISO BKT V WHITE BALANCE BKT 5 P 113 113 Option s Bracketing P 114 Taking Photographs 3 Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired bracketing settings. 4 5 Press MENU/OK to select. Take pictures. 112 Bracketing W ISO BKT Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with sensitivity lowered by the selected amount. V WHITE BALANCE BKT Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white balanced setting, one with fine-tuning increased by the selected amount, and another with fine-tuning decreased by the selected amount. 5 Taking Photographs 113 s Bracketing O AE BKT Use A SHOOTING SETTING > AE BKT SETTING to choose the bracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The camera will take the specified number of shots in sequence: one using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or under-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount. N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the limits of the exposure metering system. X FILM SIMULATION BKT Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create copies with different film simulation settings, chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING > FILM SIMULATION BKT. 5 Taking Photographs Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three shots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for the second, and 400% for the third. N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted to a minimum of ISO 320; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored when bracketing ends. 114 Bracketing Z FOCUS BKT Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTING SETTING > FOCUS BKT SETTING item offers a choice of MANUAL and AUTO bracketing. N • Do not adjust zoom during shooting. • Use of a tripod is recommended. MANUAL In MANUAL mode, you choose the following. Option FRAMES STEP INTERVAL Description Choose the number of shots. Choose the amount focus changes with each shot. Choose the interval between shots. Step Frames 1 2 3 4 5 Starting focus position • Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infinity. • Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger changes. • Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reaches infinity. 115 5 Taking Photographs Focus and FRAMES/STEP The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP is shown in the illustration. Bracketing AUTO In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP automatically. 1 Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, highlight FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK. 2 Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL. The view through the lens will be displayed. 3 Focus on the nearest end of the subject and press MENU/OK. The selected focus distance appears as A on the focus distance indicator. FOCUS BKT SETTING SET POINT A CONTROL THE FOCUS RING SET POINT B SET N The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest end of the subject first. 5 Taking Photographs 4 Focus on the farthest end of the subject and press DISP/BACK. The selected focus distance (B) and focus range (A to B) appear on the focus distance indicator. FOCUS BKT SETTING SET POINT B CONTROL THE FOCUS RING SET POINT A SET N Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK and select A again. 5 Take photographs. The camera will calculate values for FRAMES and STEP automatically. The number of frames will appear in the display. 116 NO Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) Capture motion in a series of pictures. 1 Press the DRIVE button to display drive mode options. 2 If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is selected, the camera will take pictures continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed. Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the memory card is full. all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the space available on the memory card is insufficient. • Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken. • Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus mode. • Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash may not fire. • Recording times may increase during burst shooting. • The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE. 117 5 Taking Photographs O • If file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the remaining pictures will be recorded to a new folder. • Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) Focus and Exposure • Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot. • To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AE. N Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically. 5 Taking Photographs 118 Multiple Exposures Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures. 1 Press the DRIVE button to display the drive mode options and select MULTIPLE EXPOSURE. 2 Choose a blend mode. ADDITIVE AVERAGE BRIGHT DARK 3 5 Description The camera adds the exposures together. You may need to lower exposure compensation depending on the number of shots. The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the final picture. The background in series shot without changing the composition will be optimally exposed. The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue. The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue. Take the first shot. 119 Taking Photographs Option Multiple Exposures 4 Press MENU/OK. The first shot will be shown superimposed on the view through the lens and you will be prompted to take the second shot. NEXT RETRY EXIT N • To return to the previous step and retake the first shot, press the focus stick (focus lever) left. • To save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK. 5 Take the second shot, using the first frame as a guide. EXIT 5 6 Taking Photographs Press MENU/OK. The combined exposures will be displayed as a guide to composing the next shot. RETRY EXIT N • To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press the focus stick left. • To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots taken to this point, press DISP/BACK. 7 Make additional exposures. Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures. 8 Press DISP/BACK to end shooting. The camera will create the combined image and multiple exposure shooting will end. 120 Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot The camera takes a series of 4 or 16 shots, using in-body image stabilization to move the image sensor by half a pixel with each shot and recording each frame in RAW format. Using specialized computer software, the frames can then be combined to create a high-resolution RAW picture. Press the DRIVE button to display the drive mode options and select PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT ACCURATE COLOR or PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT HIGH RESOLUTION + ACCURATE COLOR. 2 Choose a value for INTERVAL. • We recommend setting INTERVAL to SHORTEST. • If you intend to use the flash with every shot, choose a value for INTERVAL long enough to allow the flash to charge between shots. 3 Press the shutter button to start shooting. • The shots are recorded to the memory card in RAW format. • To minimize vibration, use the self-timer or a remote release. 4 Combine the shots on a computer. • The shots can be combined using FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner. • To save high-resolution RAW pictures in other formats, use Capture One Express for Fujifilm, Capture One for Fujifilm, or Capture One Pro, available from Capture One A/S. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO and RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX cannot be used for this purpose. 121 5 Taking Photographs 1 N • Visit the websites below to learn more about or download the following computer software: - FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner: https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/ Capture One Express for Fujifilm: https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm - Capture One for Fujifilm: https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm - Capture One Pro: https://www.captureone.com/explore-features • Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can be performed via tethered shooting. For this purpose, use FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner. • The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1⁄5 s or slower (14-bit RAW) or ½.5 s or slower (16-bit RAW). • The following limitations apply to the use of the pixel-shift multi-shot option: - Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can only be performed using the electronic shutter. - Sensitivity is restricted to a maximum of ISO 1600. Choosing higher values or a setting of AUTO results in a sensitivity of ISO 1600, while lower values remain unchanged. - The only option available for RAW RECORDING is LOSSLESS COMPRESSED. - Pictures taken with C (AF-C) selected for focus mode will be shot in focus mode S (AF-S). Pictures taken with S (AF-S) or M (manual) selected are shot in the chosen focus mode. - If the subject or camera moves during shooting, the desired results may not be achieved when the shots are combined. - A SHOOTING SETTING > FLICKER REDUCTION is automatically set to OFF. - The value selected for exposure compensation applies to all 4 or 16 shots. - 5 Taking Photographs 122 Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot Playback Pictures taken using the pixel-shift multi-shot option are indicated by a pixel-shift multi-shot icon in full-frame playback (P 214). 5 Taking Photographs 123 MEMO 124 The Shooting Menus 125 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust image quality settings for still photography. To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. IMAGE SIZE Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded. 6 The Shooting Menus Option O4:3 O3:2 O 16 : 9 O1:1 Image size 11648 × 8736 11648 × 7768 11648 × 6552 8736 × 8736 Option O 65 : 24 O5:4 O7:6 Image size 11648 × 4304 10928 × 8736 10192 × 8736 Option P4:3 P3:2 P 16 : 9 P1:1 Image size 8256 × 6192 8256 × 5504 8256 × 4640 6192 × 6192 Option P 65 : 24 P5:4 P7:6 Image size 8256 × 3048 7744 × 6192 7232 × 6192 Option Q4:3 Q3:2 Q 16 : 9 Q1:1 Image size 4000 × 3000 4000 × 2664 4000 × 2248 2992 × 2992 Option Q 65 : 24 Q5:4 Q7:6 Image size 4000 × 1480 3744 × 3000 3504 × 3000 N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another shooting mode is selected. 126 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) IMAGE QUALITY Choose a file format and compression ratio. Option SUPER FINE FINE Description Very low compression ratios are used for maximum image quality. Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images. Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of NORMAL images that can be stored. SUPER FINE + RAW Record both RAW and super-fine quality JPEG or HEIF images. Record both RAW and fine-quality JPEG or HEIF images. FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images. Record RAW images only. RAW The Function Buttons To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a function button (P 385). Press the button once to select the option in the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column). Option selected by pressing function button to which RAW is assigned SUPER FINE + RAW FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL FINE 127 6 The Shooting Menus Option currently selected for IMAGE QUALITY SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL SUPER FINE + RAW FINE + RAW NORMAL + RAW RAW RAW RECORDING Choose whether to compress RAW images. RECORDING TYPE Option UNCOMPRESSED LOSSLESS COMPRESSED 6 The Shooting Menus Description RAW images are not compressed. RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm that reduces file size with no loss of image data. The images can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujifilm 1, Capture One for Fujifilm 1, Capture One 1, RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED, but the resulting files are anywhere from about 30 to 90 percent (14-bit RAW) or 45 to 100 percent (16-bit RAW) of their uncompressed size. RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED, but the resulting files are anywhere from about 25 to 35 percent (14-bit RAW) or 30 to 40 percent (16-bit RAW) of their uncompressed size. 1 For information on when support will be available, visit: https://www.captureone.com/ 2 For information on when support will be available, visit: https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-poweredby-silkypix/ OUTPUT DEPTH(bit) Option 16bit 14bit Description RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 16 bits. RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits. O 16bit is available in STILL IMAGE and PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT drive modes only. 128 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) SELECT JPEG/HEIF Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF. Option JPEG HEIF Description Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG format. Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent compression but limited options for viewing and sharing. O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during multiple-exposure photography. • Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB. • HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten- sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the extension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB. 6 The Shooting Menus 129 FILM SIMULATION Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including blackand-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette according to your subject and creative intent. Option 6 Description The Shooting Menus c PROVIA/STANDARD Ideal for a wide range of subjects. d Velvia/VIVID Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature. e ASTIA/SOFT i CLASSIC CHROME c REALA ACE Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look. g PRO Neg. Hi Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast. h PRO Neg. Std Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones. g CLASSIC Neg. Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image depth. Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed photo look. Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for film look movie. Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suitable for still and movie. n NOSTALGIC Neg. X ETERNA/CINEMA N ETERNA BLEACH BYPASS 130 Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look. Faithful color reproduction with hard tonality suitable for various scenes. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Option a ACROS b MONOCHROME f SEPIA Description Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness. Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) filters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color. • d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and darkens skies. • c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably. • b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait. Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) filters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color. • e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and darkens skies. • d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably. • f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait. Shoots in sepia tone. https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories 131 6 The Shooting Menus N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness settings. • Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376). • For more information, visit: MONOCHROMATIC COLOR Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or cool color cast) to the a ACROS and b MONOCHROME monochrome film simulations. Color can be adjusted on the WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta) axes. GRAIN EFFECT Add a film grain effect. ROUGHNESS Option STRONG WEAK OFF 6 Description Choose for rougher grains. Choose for smoother grains. Turn the effect off. SIZE The Shooting Menus Option LARGE SMALL 132 Description Choose for coarser grains. Choose for finer grains. MONOCHROMATIC COLOR SET IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) COLOR CHROME EFFECT Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens. Option STRONG WEAK OFF Description Choose for a strong effect. Choose for a weak effect. Turn the effect off. COLOR CHROME FX BLUE Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues. Option STRONG WEAK OFF Description Choose for a strong effect. Choose for a weak effect. Turn the effect off. SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT Smooth complexions. 6 Description The Shooting Menus Option STRONG WEAK OFF Choose for a strong effect. Choose for a weak effect. Turn the effect off. 133 DYNAMIC RANGE Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of detail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or backlit scenes. Option Description V 100% Choose for increased contrast. AUTO W 200% Reduce loss of detail in highlights. X 400% O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value according to the scene. N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting conditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. • W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 160 to ISO 12800, X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to 12800. 6 The Shooting Menus 134 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) D RANGE PRIORITY Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes. Option AUTO STRONG WEAK OFF Description Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions. Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast scenes. Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately high-contrast scenes. Contrast reduction off. N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 160 to ISO 12800, STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to 12800. • When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF. 6 The Shooting Menus 135 WHITE BALANCE For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches the light source. 6 The Shooting Menus Option WA WHITE PRIORITY AUTO AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY k CUSTOM 1 l CUSTOM 2 m CUSTOM 3 k COLOR TEMPERATURE i DAYLIGHT j SHADE k FLUORESCENT LIGHT-1 l FLUORESCENT LIGHT-2 m FLUORESCENT LIGHT-3 n INCANDESCENT Description White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs. White balance is adjusted automatically. White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs. Measure a value for white balance. Choose a color temperature. For subjects in direct sunlight. For subjects in the shade. Use under “daylight” fluorescent lights. Use under “warm white” fluorescent lights. Use under “cool white” fluorescent lights. Use under incandescent lighting. Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater g UNDERWATER lighting. 136 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance option suited to the light source. • White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the flash off using other white balance options. • White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376). Fine-Tuning White Balance Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white balance option displays a fine-tuning dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to fine-tune white balance. WB SHIFT SET N • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after selecting a white balance option. • You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white balance. 6 The Shooting Menus 137 6 Custom White Balance Choose k, l, or m to adjust white CUSTOM 1 balance for unusual lighting conditions using a white object as a reference (colored objects can also be used to lend photos a color cast). A white balance tarSHUTTER : NEW WB SHIFT NOT CHANGE get will be displayed; position and size the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most recent value and display the fine-tuning dialog). • If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK COMPLETED ! to set white balance to the measured value. • If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure compensation and try again. SET CANCEL • If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again. The Shooting Menus k: Color Temperature Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light source. N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “colder” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real life. 138 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) 1 Select k in the white balance menu. The option currently selected for color temperature will be displayed. WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMPERATURE R:0 B:0 SET 2 Edit the color temperature using the focus stick (focus lever) and press MENU/OK. A fine-tuning dialog will be displayed. SHIFT COLOR TEMPERATURE SET SHIFT N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K by rotating the rear command dial. • Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K. • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after choosing a color temperature. Highlight a fine-tuning amount using the focus stick. Press MENU/OK. The changes will be applied. The selected color temperature will appear in the display. 6 Color Temperature Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are tinged with blue. 139 The Shooting Menus 3 4 TONE CURVE With reference to a tone curve, adjust the appearance of highlights or shadows, making them harsher or softer. Choose higher values to make shadows and highlights harsher, lower values to make them softer. Option HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS TONE CURVE HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS SET CANCEL Description -2 to +4 -2 to +4 COLOR Adjust color density. −4 6 −3 −2 −1 The Shooting Menus Options 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Options 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines. −4 −3 −2 −1 HIGH ISO NR Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose higher values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to leave outlines visible. −4 140 −3 −2 −1 Options 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) CLARITY Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased definition, lower values for a softer effect. −5 −4 −3 −2 Options −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases the time need to save each shot. LONG EXPOSURE NR Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures. Options ON OFF O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save times. Options ON OFF COLOR SPACE Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. Option sRGB Adobe RGB Description Recommended in most situations. For commercial printing. 141 6 The Shooting Menus LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. xF PIXEL MAPPING Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures or movies. 1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING tab. 2 Highlight xF PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pixel mapping. O • Results are not guaranteed. • Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping. • Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is elevated. • Processing may take several tens of seconds. 6 x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING Save custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situations. Saved settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to positions C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C6 (CUSTOM 6) (P 86). The Shooting Menus AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply automatically. Option ENABLE DISABLE 142 Description Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through CUSTOM 6 apply automatically. Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom settings must be applied manually (P 87). IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 197). Shutter Select When using lenses with an internal shutter, choose whether to use the shutter on the camera (BODY) or the lens (LENS). O This option may have no effect with some lenses. Saved Settings Store settings for up to 6 lenses, or choose OFF to disable corrections for focal length, distortion, color shading, and peripheral illumination. Choosing a Focal Length Use the focus stick (focus lever) to enter the focal length. LENS 5 INPUT FOCAL LENGTH 6 Distortion Correction Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or WEAK options to correct BARREL or PINCUSHION distortion. CANCEL LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION BARREL STRONG BARREL MEDIUM BARREL WEAK OFF PINCUSHION WEAK PINCUSHION MEDIUM PINCUSHION STRONG 143 The Shooting Menus SET Color Shading Correction Color (shading) variations between the center and edges of the frame can be adjusted separately for each corner. To use color shading correction, follow the steps below. NEXT SET 1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The selected corner is indicated by a triangle. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is no visible difference in color between the selected corner and the center of the image. • Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the cyan–red axis. • Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the blue–yellow axis. N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction 6 while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. The Shooting Menus 144 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) Peripheral Illumination Correction Choose from values between –5 and +5. Choosing positive values increases peripheral illumination, while choosing negative values reduces peripheral illumination. Positive values are recommended for vintage lenses, negative values to create the effect of images taken with an antique lens or a pinhole camera. SET CANCEL N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper. EDIT LENS NAME Change the lens name. 6 The Shooting Menus 145 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust focus settings for still photography. To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab. AF/MF SETTING FOCUS AREA AF MODE ZONE CUSTOM SETTING AF MODE ALL SETTING AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION AF POINT DISPLAYyz xFWRAP FOCUS POINT EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. FOCUS AREA Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus zoom (P 97). AF MODE Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 95). 6 The Shooting Menus ZONE CUSTOM SETTING Create custom focus zones for use when ZONE is selected for AF MODE. ZONE CUSTOM 1 Option ZONE CUSTOM 2 ZONE CUSTOM 3 AF MODE ALL SETTING Choose the focus area to be selected when AF MODE is ALL. You can match the shooting style and set only the focus area to be used. This can be set individually for when the focus mode is S (AF-S) or C (AF-C). Option AF-S 146 AF-C AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS Select focus-tracking options for focus mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according to your subject or select Set 6 for custom focus-tracking options. AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO OK Option 147 6 The Shooting Menus Description A standard tracking option that works well with SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE the typical range of moving subjects. The focus system attempts to track the chosen SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely to enter the focus area with the subject. The focus system attempts to compensate for SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/ subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for DECELERATING SUBJECT subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity. The focus system attempts to focus quickly on SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subSUBJECT jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects. Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING to sudden changes in velocity but also to large & ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT movements front to back and left to right. Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA SET 6 CUSTOM SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on the values for Sets 1–5 (P 148, 150). Focus Tracking Options The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are described below. TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. The higher the value, the longer the camera will wait. TRACKING SENSITIVITY QUICK LOCKED ON SETS THE TRACKING SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT ADJUST 0 1 Options 2 3 SWITCH 4 O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when you attempt to switch subjects. • The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus from your subject to other objects in the focus area. 6 The Shooting Menus SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY This parameter determines how sensitive the tracking system is to changes in subject velocity. The higher the value, the greater the precision with which the system attempts to respond to sudden movement. 0 Options 1 SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY STEADY ACCEL./DECEL. SETS THE SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT ADJUST SWITCH 2 O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast. 148 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ZONE AREA SWITCHING This parameter determines the focus area given priority in zone AF. ZONE AREA SWITCHING CENTER AUTO FRONT SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA ADJUST Option FRONT AUTO CENTER SWITCH Description Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera. The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it. Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone. O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode. Set Values Parameter values for the different sets are listed below. SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY 0 0 2 1 2 ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO CENTER AUTO FRONT AUTO 149 6 The Shooting Menus SET 1 SET 2 SET 3 SET 4 SET 5 TRACKING SENSITIVITY 2 3 2 0 3 Custom Focus Tracking Options Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6. 1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS > SET 6 CUSTOM. AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS SET 6 CUSTOM TRACKING SENSITIVITY SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY ZONE AREA SWITCHING ADJUST 6 AUTO SET DETAIL RESET 2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their original values, press b. 3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete. STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when the camera is in landscape orientation. The Shooting Menus Option Description OFF The same settings are used in both orientations. FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately. ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately. 150 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) AF POINT DISPLAY yz Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE. Options ON OFF xF WRAP FOCUS POINT Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another. Option ENABLE DISABLE Description Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another. Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display. Option Description Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point 117 POINTS (9 × 13) grid. Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point 425 POINTS (17 × 25) grid. 151 6 The Shooting Menus NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point selection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected for AF MODE. PRE-AF If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps prevent missed shots. Options ON OFF O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery. xF AF ILLUMINATOR If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist autofocus. Options ON 6 OFF The Shooting Menus O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator in some cases. • If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the subject. • Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s eyes. N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 200). 152 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING If the camera detects human faces, it will assign them priority over the background and adjust settings appropriately for portraits when setting focus and exposure. You can also choose whether the camera focuses on the left or right eye when face detection is on. Option O • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture is taken. • In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a whole rather than the portrait subject. • Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON automatically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. 153 6 The Shooting Menus Description Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust eye detection settings. • g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only. • u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye to focus on when a face is detected. FACE DETECTION w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential• ON ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. • v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferentially on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face Detection. OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off. N • A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with a white frame. • If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select one automatically. • You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo- 6 sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if z WIDE is selected for AF MODE. • When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH has been assigned. • If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes appear in locations where no face is seen. • Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting. • Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation. • If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus on faces. • Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376). The Shooting Menus 154 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus. Option Description Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject detection. • E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and cats. • F BIRD: Camera detects and tracks focus on birds and insects. G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on • SUBJECT the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used DETECTION ON for motor sports. • H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles. • I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes and drones. • J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver compartments or front ends of trains. OFF Subject detection off. ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING. 155 The Shooting Menus O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical- 6 N • A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area will be marked with a white frame. • If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will select one automatically. • You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to reposition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if z WIDE is selected for AF MODE. • If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen. • Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting. • Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation. • Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376). 6 The Shooting Menus 156 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) AF+MF If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring. Options ON OFF O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the focus distance indicator. • If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to infinity or the minimum focus distance. N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated. • DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist options selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used. 157 6 The Shooting Menus AF + MF Focus Zoom Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear command dial. MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104). Option Description Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR) DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the IMAGE split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of the split image are correctly aligned. A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject DIGITAL is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when MICROPRISM the subject is in focus. FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and HIGHLIGHT peaking level. OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used). INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING If ON is selected, the display configured by MF ASSIST appears only when the focus ring was turned during manual focus mode. Options 6 ON The Shooting Menus 158 OFF AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) FOCUS CHECK If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode. Options ON OFF N • Press the focus stick (focus lever) to cancel focus zoom. • The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes when the focus area is changed. INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or MULTI metering is selected. Options ON OFF Option AF-S AF-C Description The camera focuses when the button is pressed. The camera focuses while the button is pressed. N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202). 159 6 The Shooting Menus xF INSTANT AF SETTING Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode. xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale. Option Description Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of field PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers or other electronic displays. Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of field FILM FORMAT for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example BASIS as prints. N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202). RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY Choose how the camera behaves when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Settings for AF-S and AF-C focus modes can be selected separately. Option 6 RELEASE The Shooting Menus FOCUS Description Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken when the camera is not in focus. Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only taken when the camera is in focus. O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF. 160 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) xF AF RANGE LIMITER Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus speed. Option OFF CUSTOM PRESET1 PRESET2 Description Focus limiter disabled. Limit focus to a range of distances defined by a minimum and maximum. • OK: Limit focus to the selected range. • SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance between them. Limit focus to a preset range. O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the minimum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter. • The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ from the actual focus distance. • Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with focus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens. - range. Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring. • Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202). 161 The Shooting Menus N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM is selected: - You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus 6 TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. Mode AF AF OFF 6 Description In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your • subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AF OFF icon. • In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap the AF OFF icon. • In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus. AREA Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will move to the selected point. OFF Touch screen mode off. The Shooting Menus N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode. • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. 162 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) Touch Controls for Focus Zoom Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled). Central Area Tapping the center of the display performs the operations below. Mode AF AREA OFF Operation performed AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF Other Areas Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display, whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected for touch screen mode. 6 The Shooting Menus 163 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust shooting options for still photography. To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab. N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. SHOOTING SETTING SELF-TIMER SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING SELF-TIMER LAMP INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE AE BKT SETTING FILM SIMULATION BKT EXIT SELF-TIMER Choose a shutter release delay. Option 6 The Shooting Menus Description The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter R 2 SEC button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts down. The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed. S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken. OFF Self-timer off. If an option other than OFF is selected, the timer will start when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The display shows the number of seconds remaining until the shutter is released. To stop the timer before the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK. 9 O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure. • The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off. 164 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remain in effect after the camera is turned off. Options ON OFF SELF-TIMER LAMP If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit. Options ON OFF 6 The Shooting Menus 165 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset interval. 1 2 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab and press MENU/OK. INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER and press MENU/OK. Interval-timer settings will be displayed. INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER WITH EXTERNAL TIMER INTERVAL NUMBER OF TIMES END CANCEL N If you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH EXTERNAL TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display, where you can start interval-timer photography using the remote release. 6 The Shooting Menus 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the interval and number of shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed. START WAITING TIME LATER ESTIMATED START TIME START 166 PM CANCEL SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) 4 Use the focus stick to choose the starting time and then press MENU/OK. Shooting will start automatically. CANCEL O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of “bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released. N • Use of a tripod is recommended. • We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter. • To view the pictures taken so far, press the a button during inter- 167 6 The Shooting Menus val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press the a button again or wait until the start of the next interval. • The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before the next shot is taken. • The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button. • The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during interval-timer photography. • To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photography started, set the number of shots to ∞. INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots. Options ON OFF O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er- ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim dramatically during shooting. • In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an AUTO option is selected for ISO. INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during interval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not longer than the interval between photographs. Options 6 ON OFF The Shooting Menus O This option takes effect only when shutter speed is set to A (auto). 168 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) AE BKT SETTING Adjust exposure bracketing settings. Option Description Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the amount exposure is varied with each shot. FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing • FRAMES/STEP SETTING sequence. • STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each shot. • 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken one at a time. 1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS • CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken in a single burst. SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken. FILM SIMULATION BKT Choose the three film simulation types used for film simulation bracketing (P 130). PHOTOMETRY Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 108). 169 6 The Shooting Menus FOCUS BKT SETTING Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes (P 115). SHUTTER TYPE Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute the shutter sound. Option t MECHANICAL SHUTTER s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER t E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER u MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC Description Take pictures with the mechanical shutter. Take pictures with the electronic shutter. The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions. The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic shutter according to shooting conditions. The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or r E-FRONT + ELECTRONIC electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions. If t E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER is selected, t MECHANICAL SHUTTER will automatically take effect at high shutter speeds. O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following: - Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects. - Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high 6 The Shooting Menus shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended. Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights or other flickering or erratic illumination. - When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 340), respect your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy. • When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following: - Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame. - N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used: • Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 80–12800 • Long exposure noise reduction has no effect • The flash will not fire unless pixel-shift multi-shot is enabled. 170 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) FLICKER REDUCTION Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting under fluorescent lighting and other similar light sources. Option Description Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous shooting frame rate reduces. Flicker measurement is taken prior to the first frame only and the same reduction amount is applied to all subsequent frames that flicker may occur. Flicker reduction disabled. ALL FRAMES FIRST FRAME OFF O • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures. • OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shutter is used. • Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording. FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting and the like. 6 Options The Shooting Menus ON OFF N This option takes effect only in modes S and M. ISO Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 106). 171 IS MODE Turn image stabilization on or off. Option CONTINUOUS SHOOTING ONLY OFF Description Image stabilization on. Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released. Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display. N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE. • Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image stabilization takes effect. 35mm FORMAT MODE Enabling A SHOOTING SETTING > 35mm FORMAT MODE in the shooting menu sets the picture angle to 35 mm; the change is reflected in the display. 6 The Shooting Menus Option ON OFF AUTO Description The picture angle is set to 35 mm; the change is reflected in the display. 35 mm format mode disabled. 35 mm format mode is enabled automatically when a mount adapter that supports automatic detection is attached. N • The D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING item in the setup menu (P 25, 349) includes an option (enabled by default) for displaying a 35mm FORMAT MODE icon. • The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shooting menu is fixed at O 3 : 2. 172 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography) xF COOLING FAN SETTING Adjust settings for optional cooling fans (P 416). Option AUTO1 AUTO2 LOW HIGH OFF Description The fan turns on automatically as required when camera temperature rises and runs at slow speed. The fan turns on automatically as required when camera temperature rises and runs at high speed. The increased fan noise may be audible in movies. Run the fan continuously at low speed. Run the fan continuously at high speed. The increased fan noise may be audible in movies. Turn the fan off. N For more information, visit: https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/ 173 6 The Shooting Menus xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The smartphone can then be used to: • Control the camera and take pictures remotely • Receive pictures uploaded from the camera • Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures • Upload location data to the camera FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) Adjust flash-related settings for still photography. To display flash settings, press MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and select the F (FLASH SETTING) tab. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT FLASH FUNCTION SETTING Choose a flash control mode, flash mode, or sync mode or adjust the flash level. The options available vary with the flash. MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH N For more information on flash settings, see “External Flash Units” (P 400) in “Peripherals and Optional Accessories”. 6 ADJUST RED EYE REMOVAL Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash. The Shooting Menus Option FLASH OFF Description Flash red-eye reduction only. Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off. N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode. 174 END FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) TTL-LOCK MODE Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control can be locked for consistent results across a series of photographs. Option Description Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most LOCK WITH LAST FLASH recent photo. LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-flashes and locks flash FLASH output at the metered value. N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 385). • Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect. • Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no previously metered value exists. LED LIGHT SETTING Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. Role of LED video light in still photography Catchlight AF-assist illuminator AF-assist illuminator and catchlight None N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. 175 The Shooting Menus Option CATCHLIGHT AF ASSIST AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT OFF 6 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) COMMANDER SETTING Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option is available when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control. Options Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION SETTING menu. CH SETTING Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. Options 6 CH1 The Shooting Menus 176 CH2 CH3 CH4 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust movie-recording options. To display options for movie recording, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING) tab. MOVIE SETTING MOVIE SETTING LIST IMAGE FORMAT MOVIE MODE HIGH SPEED REC SELF-TIMER MEDIA REC SETTING HDMI OUTPUT SETTING FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION EXIT MOVIE SETTING LIST View current movie recording settings. N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while the movie quick menu is displayed. IMAGE FORMAT You can change the format of movies to be shot depending on the lens to be used. Frame size and aspect ratio are set by MOVIE MODE. Description Shoot in the optimal format for GF Series lenses. Shoot in the optimal format for Premista Series lenses. Shoot in the optimal format for 35-mm format lenses. Shoot in the optimal format for anamorphic lenses. You can ANAMORPHIC(35mm) configure the lens magnification or whether to use the desqueeze display when taking pictures. O • When ANAMORPHIC(35mm) is set, an anti-vibration function operates to match the configured magnification. Do not set ANAMORPHIC(35mm) when using a lens other than an anamorphic lens. • When B MOVIE SETTING > HDMI OUTPUT SETTING > HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY is set to OFF, HDMI output does not use the desqueeze display, even when desqueeze display is set to ON for ANAMORPHIC(35mm). 177 6 The Shooting Menus Option GF Premista 35mm MOVIE MODE Before shooting movies, choose the frame rate and the frame size and aspect ratio. MOVIE MODE END CANCEL 1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then highlight MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the desired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stick right. The setting values that can be selected depend on the IMAGE FORMAT setting. 3 6 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a frame rate (B) and press MENU/OK. The Shooting Menus 23.98P 24P 25P Options 29.97P 50P N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode. 178 59.94P MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) HIGH SPEED REC Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON to choose the recording and playback rates separately. N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback frame-rate selection. Frame Size Options W16 : 9 W17 : 9 Recording Options 100P 120P 6 Playback 24P 25P Options 29.97P 50P 59.94P N • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound. • The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the goal of maintaining the selected bit rate. • The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected for rate of recording. 179 The Shooting Menus 23.98P F SELF-TIMER Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the start of recording. • The display shows the number of seconds remaining before recording begins. • To stop the timer before recording begins, press DISP/BACK. Options 3 SEC 6 The Shooting Menus 180 5 SEC 10 SEC OFF MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) MEDIA REC SETTING Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, bit rate, and proxy video. MEDIA REC SETTING Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, and compression. Destination Choose save options and save and output destinations for movies. Option P Q R T Y O The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup copies cannot be adjusted separately. 181 6 The Shooting Menus U Description Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 1. Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 2. Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the card fills. Any additional footage will then automatically be recorded to the card in Slot 2. Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card. Movies are recorded only to an SSD connected to the USB connector. Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI. File Type and Compression Choose the movie file type and compression. Option H.264 ALL-I 420 MOV H.264 LongGOP 420 MOV H.264 LongGOP 420 MP4 H.265 ALL-I 420 MOV H.265 LongGOP 420 MOV 6 The Shooting Menus H.265 ALL-I 422 MOV H.265 LongGOP 422 MOV ProRes HQ MOV * ProRes 422 MOV * ProRes LT MOV * Description A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling. A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling. A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded to the web. A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling. A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling. A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling. A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling. Record movies in ProRes 422 HQ format. Record movies in ProRes 422 format. Record movies in ProRes 422 LT format. * Available only when P is selected as the destination. 182 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) N • The ProRes format is intended for the footage will be edited on a computer or the like. • 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of 8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits. • All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the fact that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good choice for footage that will be further processed. • Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies. • The options available for file type and compression vary with the options selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG RECORDING. Bit Rate Choose the movie bit rate. 50Mbps 100Mbps Options 200Mbps 360Mbps 720Mbps N • The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for 183 6 The Shooting Menus high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate may be slower than the selected value depending on the subject. • The bit rate for ProRes movies is set automatically according to the format chosen and the frame size and rate. For more information, visit the Apple website. PROXY SETTING (ONLY WHEN REC ProRes) Choose whether the camera simultaneously records a duplicate “proxy” video with movies shot in ProRes format. Option Description ON (H.264) Record proxy videos in H.264 format. ON (ProRes Proxy) Record proxy videos in ProRes Proxy format. OFF Proxy recording disabled. O • Proxy recording is not available at a frame size of 8K if the frame rate is either 29.97P or 25P. • Deleting the original footage from the camera also deletes the proxy video. The original and proxy videos cannot be deleted separately. • When deleting movies from camera memory cards using a computer, be sure to delete both the originals and the proxies. HDMI OUTPUT SETTING Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an HDMI device. 6 The Shooting Menus HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected will mirror the information in the camera display. Options ON OFF HDMI REC CONTROL Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start and stop movie recording. Options ON 184 OFF MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) RAW OUTPUT SETTING Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders connected via HDMI. Option Description RAW OUTPUT Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders. SETTING ATOMOS RAW OUTPUT Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders. SETTING Blackmagic OFF Do not output RAW footage to external recorders. N • Movie frame size automatically changes to 8K. • RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory cards inserted in the camera. • In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output. • ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 640 and ISO 12800. • Footage output to external devices is generated from the original FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION Fix the movie crop ratio according to the IMAGE FORMAT setting. This makes it easier to match crops after changing movie settings. Options ON OFF 185 6 The Shooting Menus RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-production or the like. • Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output. • RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not display correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic. • RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording modes. F-Log/HLG RECORDING Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device. Option Description The footage is processed using film simulation and both cPYP saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device. The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to c F-Log Y F-Log the HDMI device in F-Log format. The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to c FLog2 Y FLog2 the HDMI device in F-Log2 format. The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to c HLG Y HLG the HDMI device in HLG format. N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit- 6 The Shooting Menus able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 400 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 800 and ISO 12800 (FLog2). • The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the international ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 640 and ISO 12800. • Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > F FILM SIMULATION in the shooting menu. 186 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) DATA LEVEL SETTING Choose a signal range for movie recording. Option VIDEO RANGE FULL RANGE Description The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that for 10-bit movies to 64–940. The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively 0–255 and 0–1023. F PHOTOMETRY Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 108). F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 171). Options ON OFF 6 The Shooting Menus 187 F IS MODE Choose the image stabilization mode. Option IBIS/OIS IBIS/OIS + DIS OFF Description Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization. IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS. Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option selected for MOVIE MODE. This setting can compensate for more severe camera shake. Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display. N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode. • Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image stabilization takes effect. F IS MODE BOOST Choose the image stabilization level. Option ON OFF 6 The Shooting Menus Description Suitable for shots with no panning. Suitable for shots with panning. N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image stabilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 385). 188 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) F ISO Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light. Option Description Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may be reduced and that pictures may be mottled. Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display. The ISO sensitivity (ISO 100 to ISO 12800) for the brightness of the subject is set automatically. H (25600) 100–12800 AUTO ZEBRA SETTING Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes in the movie mode display. Option ZEBRA RIGHT ZEBRA LEFT OFF Description Right-slanting stripes. Left-slanting stripes. Stripes off. 6 50 55 60 65 70 Options 75 80 85 90 95 100 189 The Shooting Menus ZEBRA LEVEL Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display. WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE Choose whether to display chrominance and luminance signals during movie recording. The position and size can be changed using the focus stick (focus lever) and command dials. Options WAVEFORM PARADE VECTORSCOPE WAVEFORM A waveform is displayed. 6 PARADE An RGB parade is displayed. You can change the display method for colors by turning the front command dial. OFF WAVEFORM SETTING The Shooting Menus SWITCH DISP. COLOR SWITCH DISP. PARADE SETTING SET 190 SET MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) VECTORSCOPE A vectorscope is displayed. VECTORSCOPE SETTING SET SWITCH DISP. OFF Neither a waveform monitor, a parade, nor a vectorscope is displayed. MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the command dials and touch-screen controls. You may find this helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being recorded with movies (P 36). Options ON 6 OFF Options ON OFF N The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie recording. 191 The Shooting Menus F REC FRAME INDICATOR If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during movie recording. TALLY LIGHT Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady. Indicator lamp 6 The Shooting Menus Option FRONT OFF REAR z FRONT OFF REAR y FRONT z REAR z FRONT z REAR OFF FRONT y REAR y FRONT y REAR OFF FRONT OFF REAR OFF 192 AF-assist illuminator Description The indicator lamp lights during movie recording. The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording. The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording. The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording. MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) xF COOLING FAN SETTING This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173). F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 86). F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142). xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173). 6 The Shooting Menus 193 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust image quality settings for movies. To display image quality settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) tab. IMAGE QUALITY SETTING FFILM SIMULATION FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR FDYNAMIC RANGE FWHITE BALANCE FTONE CURVE FCOLOR FSHARPNESS FHIGH ISO NR EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. F FILM SIMULATION Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 130). 6 F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 132). The Shooting Menus 194 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) F DYNAMIC RANGE Choose a dynamic range for movie recording. Option V100% W200% X400% Description See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 134). N • AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during movie recording. • W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 200 to ISO 12800, X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 400 to 12800. item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIE SETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING. • This F WHITE BALANCE Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 136). F COLOR Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 140). 195 6 The Shooting Menus F TONE CURVE Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 140). F SHARPNESS Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 140). F HIGH ISO NR Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 140). INTERFRAME NR Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction according to shooting conditions. Options AUTO OFF N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved during shooting. 6 xF PIXEL MAPPING This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142). The Shooting Menus 196 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY Choose whether to make the dynamic range wider when shooting F-Log2 movies with IMAGE FORMAT set to GF or Premista, image size set to d or V, and a frame rate of 30 fps or less. The rolling shutter effect may occur when this setting is enabled. Options ON OFF F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during movie recording. Options ON OFF N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING This item is also found in the photo menus (P 143). Changes to one apply to the other. 197 6 The Shooting Menus is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION in the shooting menu (P 145). • Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this option. AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust focus settings for movies. To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab. AF/MF SETTING FFOCUS AREA FAF MODE FAF-C CUSTOM SETTING xFWRAP FOCUS POINT xFAF ILLUMINATOR FgFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING FSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING FAF+MF EXIT N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected. F FOCUS AREA Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus zoom (P 97). O The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress. 6 F AF MODE Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording. The Shooting Menus Option MULTI WIDE/TRACKING AREA 198 Description The camera selects the focus area automatically. The camera tracks the subject automatically if the focus stick (focus lever) is pushed to the center or the screen is touched when the focus mode is C. The camera selects the focus subject automatically when the focus mode is S. The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area. AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus mode C. TRACKING SENSITIVITY Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 148). 0 1 Options 2 3 4 O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when you attempt to switch subjects. • The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus from your subject to other objects in the focus area. AF SPEED Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for faster response times, lower values for slower response times. −4 −3 −2 +2 +3 +4 +5 xF WRAP FOCUS POINT This item is also found in the photo menus (P 151). Changes to one apply to the other. 199 6 The Shooting Menus −5 Options −1 0 +1 xF AF ILLUMINATOR This item is also found in the photo menus (P 152). Changes to one apply to the other. Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording movies. Option FACE DETECTION ON OFF Description See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 153). Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off. O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus using continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual focus mode. 6 F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 155). The Shooting Menus O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S. Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode. 200 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) F AF+MF Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON button. Options ON OFF F MF ASSIST Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104). Option Description The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT color and peaking level. A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind FOCUS METER the subject. FOCUS METER + PEAK Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights. HIGHLIGHT Indicators for locations in and out of focus are displayed FOCUS MAP on the screen. OFF Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used). 201 6 The Shooting Menus F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 158). F FOCUS CHECK Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings must be adjusted separately (P 159). xF INSTANT AF SETTING This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to one apply to the other. xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE This item is also found in the photo menus (P 160). Changes to one apply to the other. xF AF RANGE LIMITER This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to one apply to the other. 6 The Shooting Menus 202 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) F TOUCH SCREEN MODE Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls. Mode AF AREA Touch screen mode off. N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode. • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING. 203 6 The Shooting Menus OFF Description Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. • In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping your subject in the display. • In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display. • When shooting movies in focus mode M (MF), you can tap the display before recording begins to focus on the selected point using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to position the focus point. Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start and stop recording. • In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use the button to which AF-ON is assigned. • In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display. • In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to position the focus area over your subject. AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) Touch Controls for Focus Zoom Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled). Central Area Tapping the center of the display performs the operations below. Mode AF AREA OFF 6 Operation performed AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S: AF MF: Instant AF AF-S/MF: OFF The Shooting Menus Other Areas Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display, whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected for touch screen mode. FOCUS CHECK LOCK Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie recording begins. Options ON 204 OFF AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming. To display audio settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the P (AUDIO SETTING) tab. AUDIO SETTING INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MIC JACK SETTING MIC LEVEL LIMITER WIND FILTER LOW CUT FILTER HEADPHONES VOLUME MIC/REMOTE RELEASE EXIT INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone. Option AUTO MANUAL OFF Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording levels. Turn the built-in microphone off. EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Adjust the recording level for external microphones. MANUAL OFF Description The camera adjusts the recording level automatically. Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording levels. Disable recording using external microphones. 205 The Shooting Menus Option AUTO 6 MIC JACK SETTING Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack. Option MIC LINE Description Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone. Choose this option for external audio devices connected via line output. MIC LEVEL LIMITER Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the microphone’s audio circuits. Options ON OFF WIND FILTER Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie recording. 6 Options The Shooting Menus ON 206 OFF AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) LOW CUT FILTER Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording. Options ON OFF HEADPHONES VOLUME Adjust the headphone volume. Option 0 1—10 Description Mute output to the headphones. Choose a volume of from 1 to 10. MIC/REMOTE RELEASE Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/remote release connector is a microphone or a remote release. Options m MIC n REMOTE 6 The Shooting Menus 207 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording) XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use with XLR microphone adapters. Option 6 The Shooting Menus Description Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel (stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the XLR microphone adapter. MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with the help of the camera’s built-in microphone. • 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using only an external microphone connected via the XLR microphone adapter. Choose the source of sound output to headphones or other audio monitors during movie recording. XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con• 4ch AUDIO MONITORING nected via the XLR microphone adapter. • CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone. Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector. • XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via HDMI 4ch AUDIO the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT nector. • CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is output to the HDMI connector. N • If an XLR microphone adapter will be used, remove the viewfinder. • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone but via the external microphone instead. • Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for movie file format. 208 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) display settings for movie recording. To display time code settings, press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING) tab. TIME CODE SETTING TIME CODE DISPLAY START TIME SETTING COUNT UP SETTING DROP FRAME HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING EXIT TIME CODE DISPLAY Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and playback. Options ON OFF START TIME SETTING Choose the time code starting time. 6 The Shooting Menus Option Description MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually. CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time. RESET Set the start time to 00:00:00. 209 COUNT UP SETTING Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during movie recording. Option REC RUN FREE RUN Description Time is clocked only during movie recording. Time is clocked continuously. DROP FRAME At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradually develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second). Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match the recording time to the time code. Option ON OFF 6 Description The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict match between the time code and the actual recording time. Frames are not dropped. N • The time code display varies with the option selected. The Shooting Menus ON OFF • Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop. 210 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices. Options ON OFF TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING Choose whether to synchronize time codes with an external device. CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT If ON is selected, the camera connects with paired external devices and synchronizes time codes. Because simultaneous connection with a smartphone is not possible, the smartphone icon is displayed in the yellow on the screen. Options ON OFF PAIRING REGISTRATION Pair the ATOMOS AirGlu BT and camera. 6 The Shooting Menus • If the camera connects with the ATOMOS AirGlu BT, an icon appears on the screen. • The pairing with the ATOMOS AirGlu BT can be ended using Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth DEVICE LIST in the network/USB setting menu. 211 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording) Time code synchronization state You can check the time code synchronization state by the icons displayed on the EVF or LCD. Icon (white) (white) (amber) 6 The Shooting Menus (red) 212 Synchronization state The time code synchronization function is not being used. Time codes are being synchronized. External devices have been disconnected or time codes are not being synchronized. If time codes have been synchronized once, and the camera continues to count internally after CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value is displayed. Time codes are not being synchronized because the frame rate settings are different. If time codes have been synchronized once, and the camera continues to count internally after CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value is displayed. Playback and the Playback Menu 213 The Playback Display This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during playback. O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit. A B C D E F G H I 12/31/2023 Playback and the Playback Menu 7 n m l k J K L M N j i h g f e O d c 214 b a Z Y X W V U TS R Q P The Playback Display U Film simulation ............................................130 V Dynamic range ............................................134 W White balance ..............................................136 X Sensitivity .......................................................171 Y Exposure compensation ............................109 Z Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82 a Time code.......................................................209 b Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82 c Playback mode indicator .............................63 d Movie icon ........................................................73 e Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio ... 208 f Bluetooth host ..............................................247 g Photobook assist indicator .......................236 h Bluetooth ON/OFF i DPOF print indicator ...................................238 j Frame.io connection status ......................274 k Voice memo ..................................................230 l Gift image .........................................................63 m Rating..............................................................231 n Face detection indicator ............................153 215 Playback and the Playback Menu A Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 B Frame-number display C Image transfer order D FTP image transfer order E Frame.io image transfer order F Image transfer status G FTP upload progress H Frame.io upload progress I Frame number..............................................369 J SSD connection status ..................................49 K Card slot..........................................................220 L Pixel-shift multi-shot ..................................121 M Protected image ...........................................228 N Location data................................................373 O Low battery ......................................................55 P Image quality................................................127 Q Movie mode ..................................................178 R HEIF ..................................................................129 S Image size ......................................................126 T Film format ....................................................182 7 The DISP/BACK Button The DISP/BACK button controls the display of indicators during playback. Standard 12/31/2023 Information off 1/999 Playback and the Playback Menu 12/31/2023 1/999 NEXT 7 Info display 216 The Playback Display Viewing Photo Information The photo information display changes each time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up. Basic data 12/31/2023 Info display 1 1/999 12/31/2023 1/999 Playback and the Playback Menu NEXT 12/31/2022 1/1000 S.S 1/1000 F 5.6 ISO 12800 5.6 12800 +1.0 BACK Info display 3 +1.0 NEXT 7 Info display 2 Zooming in on the Focus Point Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point. Press again to return to full-frame playback. 217 Viewing Pictures Read this section for information on playback zoom and multi-frame playback. Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Rotate the rear command dial to right or left, the display changes as shown. The display changes in reverse order when rotate the dial to opposite direction. Playback and the Playback Menu N To cancel playback zoom or multi-frame playback, press DISP/BACK or MENU/OK. Maximum zoom Medium zoom Playback zoom 7 Full-frame playback Multi-frame playback Nine-frame view 218 Hundred- frame view Viewing Pictures Playback Zoom Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK, or the center of the rear command dial. N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE. Scroll When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick (focus lever) can be used to view areas of the image not currently visible in the display. Multi-Frame Playback To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear command dial left when a picture is displayed full frame. N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK to view the highlighted image full frame. • In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or down to view more pictures. 219 Playback and the Playback Menu Navigation window 7 The Playback Menu Adjust playback settings. The playback menu is displayed when you press MENU/OK in playback mode. PLAY BACK MENU SWITCH SLOT RAW CONVERSION HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ERASE SIMULTANEOUS DELETE CROP RESIZE PROTECT EXIT Playback and the Playback Menu SWITCH SLOT Choose the card or SSD from which images will be played back. N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button during playback to choose a card for playback. 7 220 The Playback Menu RAW CONVERSION Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats. Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format 1 2 3 Display a RAW picture. Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu. Press MENU/OK. A list of settings will be displayed. RAW CONVERSION CREATE 4 5 CANCEL Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a setting. Press the focus stick right to display RAW CONVERSION options. 100% 200% 400% Playback and the Playback Menu REFLECT SHOOTING COND. FILE TYPE IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY PUSH/PULL PROCESSING DYNAMIC RANGE 7 6 7 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option. 8 Press the Q button. A preview of the copy will be displayed. 9 Press MENU/OK. The copy will be saved. Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to adjust additional settings. N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q button when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback. 221 The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from RAW to another format are: Setting Playback and the Playback Menu 7 Description Create a copy using the settings in effect at the time REFLECT SHOOTING COND. the photo was taken. FILE TYPE Choose a file format. IMAGE SIZE Choose an image size. IMAGE QUALITY Adjust image quality. PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure. DYNAMIC RANGE Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast. Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows D RANGE PRIORITY for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes. FILM SIMULATION Simulate the effects of different types of film. Choose a monochrome tint for photographs takMONOCHROMATIC COLOR en using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS and b MONOCHROME. GRAIN EFFECT Add a film grain effect. Increase the range of tones available for rendering COLOR CHROME EFFECT colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens. Increase the range of tones available for rendering COLOR CHROME FX BLUE blues. SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT Smooth complexions. WHITE BALANCE Adjust white balance. WB SHIFT Fine-tune white balance. TONE CURVE Adjust highlights and shadows. COLOR Adjust color density. SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines. HIGH ISO NR Process the copy to reduce mottling. CLARITY Increase definition. Improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens. COLOR SPACE Choose the color space used for color reproduction. O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen when the picture was taken. 222 The Playback Menu HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF. SELECT IMAGES Select HEIF pictures for conversion. FILE FORMAT Choose a format for the converted pictures. TIFF 16bit SELECT SLOT TO RECORD Choose the destination to which the converted pictures will be saved. SSD Options SLOT 1 SLOT 2 Playback and the Playback Menu JPEG Options TIFF 8bit 7 223 ERASE Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures. O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding. Option FRAME SELECTED FRAMES ALL FRAMES Description Delete pictures one at a time. Delete multiple selected pictures. Delete all unprotected pictures. Playback and the Playback Menu FRAME 1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK. • Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the focus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to delete. 7 224 The Playback Menu SELECTED FRAMES 1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select. • Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R). • To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again. 3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a confirmation dialog. 4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pictures. N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S. ALL FRAMES 1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu. 2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures. N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted before the button was pressed cannot be recovered. • If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures. 225 Playback and the Playback Menu 2 7 SIMULTANEOUS DELETE Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or HEIF copy. Option ON OFF Playback and the Playback Menu 7 Description Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2. Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2. CROP Create a cropped copy of the current picture. 1 2 3 Display the desired picture. 4 5 Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog. Select CROP in the playback menu. Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the picture until the desired portion is displayed. Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate file. N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the cropped copy. • If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow. • All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2. 226 The Playback Menu RESIZE Create a small copy of the current picture. 1 2 3 Display the desired picture. 4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate file. Select RESIZE in the playback menu. Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog. Playback and the Playback Menu N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image. 7 227 PROTECT Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK. Option FRAME SET ALL RESET ALL Description Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete. Protect all pictures. Remove protection from all pictures. Playback and the Playback Menu O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted. N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smartphones or tablets removes upload marking. • Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the AFON button during playback. 7 228 The Playback Menu IMAGE ROTATE Rotate pictures. 1 2 3 4 Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB. 5 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the camera. Display the desired picture. Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu. Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture 90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise. devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when viewed on a computer or on other cameras. • Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are automatically displayed in the correct orientation during playback. Playback and the Playback Menu N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before rotating pictures. • The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other 7 229 VOICE MEMO SETTING Add a voice memo to the current photograph. 1 2 3 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu. Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo. Press and hold the center of the front command dial to record the memo. Recording ends after 30 s or when you release the dial. Playback and the Playback Menu N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos. • Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures. • Deleting the picture also deletes the memo. Playing Voice Memos Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback. • To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front command dial. • A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back. • Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume. Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME. 7 230 The Playback Menu RATING Rate pictures using stars. 1 2 Select RATING in the playback menu. Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars (“I”). single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback. • Use touch controls to zoom in or out. • Ratings cannot be applied to: - Protected pictures - Movies - “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras) Playback and the Playback Menu N • The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front command dial to choose a picture. • The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in 7 231 COPY Copy pictures between a card in the first slot, a card in the second slot, and an SSD connected to the USB connector. 1 2 Select COPY in the playback menu. Highlight one of the following options. Playback and the Playback Menu Option Description SSD y SLOT1 Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the first slot. SSD y SLOT2 Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the second slot. SLOT1 y SSD Copy pictures from the card in the first slot to the SSD. Copy pictures from the card in the first slot to the card in SLOT1 y SLOT2 the second slot. SLOT2 y SSD Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the SSD. Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card SLOT2 y SLOT1 in the first slot. 3 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) right. Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK. Option FRAME 7 ALL FRAMES Description Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture. Copy all pictures. O • Copying ends when the destination is full. • If you attempt to copy a file over 4 GB in size to a memory card with a capacity of 32 GB or less, copying will end and the file will not be copied. 232 The Playback Menu TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via Bluetooth. 1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER. N Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking from all pictures before proceeding. 2 Press DISP/BACK and select START TRANSFER. The selected pictures will be uploaded. SELECT IMAGE FRAME SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE SELECT FINISH/SETTING Playback and the Playback Menu 3 Mark pictures for upload. Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to mark them for upload. • To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK before marking begins. • To select all pictures, press the Q button. • Selecting any two pictures with the AEL button also selects all pictures between them. 7 SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER START TRANSFER FILTERING SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND START TRANSFER 233 Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog. • To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER teria, choose FILTERING. START TRANSFER FILTERING • To switch to the memory card in the other slot, SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT. FILTERING THE IMAGE WITH CONDITIONS O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upPlayback and the Playback Menu 7 load marking. N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures. • The following cannot be selected for upload: - Protected pictures - Movies - RAW images - “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras) • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will continue even while the camera is off. • When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button. 234 The Playback Menu xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone can then be used to: • Control the camera and take pictures remotely • Receive pictures uploaded from the camera • Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures • Upload location data to the camera for D BUTTON/ DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the smartphone using the Fn1 button. DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK If ON is selected, movies taken when B MOVIE SETTING > IMAGE FORMAT is set to ANAMORPHIC(35mm) are played back at the magnification specified when taken. Options ON OFF Playback and the Playback Menu N • For downloads and other information, visit: https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/ • If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected 7 235 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST Create books from your favorite photos. Creating a Photobook 1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOK ASSIST. 2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus lever) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the book is complete. Playback and the Playback Menu N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected for photobooks. • The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the focus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead. 3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to select all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu. N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures. • Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted. 7 236 The Playback Menu Viewing Photobooks Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through the pictures. Playback and the Playback Menu Editing and Deleting Photobooks Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the onscreen instructions. • EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”. • ERASE: Delete the book. 7 237 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers. Playback and the Playback Menu 1 2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF). 3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the print order. 4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to choose the number of copies (up to 99). Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pictures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before proceeding. N To remove a picture from the order, press the focus stick down until the number of copies is 0. 7 PRINT ORDER (DPOF) DPOF: 00001 01 SHEETS FRAME SET Total number of prints Number of copies N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order. 5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press MENU/OK to exit. N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon during playback. • Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single memory card. • If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an- other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as described above. 238 The Playback Menu instax PRINTER PRINT To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/ USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and password, then follow the steps below. 1 2 Turn the printer on. Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer. PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING CANCEL 3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. • The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. • The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 239 Playback and the Playback Menu FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 7 The Playback Menu DISP ASPECT Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when an HDMI cable is connected). Options Playback and the Playback Menu 16 : 9 4:3 N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 4 : 3 full screen. The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms cropped out. 7 240 Network/USB Setting Menus 241 Overview This chapter outlines features that can among other things be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer. Supported Features This camera supports the following features: Features that can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION SETTING Feature Network/USB Setting Menus 8 Description Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload Connecting to the pictures or control the camera remotely while the smartphone app smartphone displays the view through the lens. Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone USB card readers via USB and copy pictures from memory cards. Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use Web camera as a webcam. instax printers Print pictures on connected instax printers. Take pictures from a computer to which the camera Tethered photography is connected (“tethered”) via a USB cable. Harness the power of the camera’s image RAW processing processing engine when processing RAW pictures on a computer. Saving and Loading Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a Settings computer. P 247 252 257 258 260 291 292 These features can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 242 Overview Features that can be accessed if set by CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING Feature Description Take pictures from a computer to which the camera Tethered photography is connected (“tethered”) via wireless or wired LAN. Upload to FTP servers Upload files to FTP servers. Remote movie Control the camera and take pictures remotely using recording a web browser on a computer or tablet. P 260 278 293 These features can be accessed by selecting a connection setting profile to which the desired settings and connection type have been saved using CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING. Features that can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting menu Description Upload files to Frame.io. P 270 These features can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting menu. Network/USB Setting Menus Feature Upload to Frame.io 8 243 Camera indicator lamp display The camera indicator lamp shows the status of its connection to computers, Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like. Indicator lamp Blinks red Glows red Blinks orange Network/USB Setting Menus Blinks orange and red Blinks green Blinks green and red 8 244 Connection status No network connection. No network connection; pictures awaiting upload. Connected to network but not to computer tethered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server. Connected to network but not to computer tethered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server; pictures awaiting upload. Ready for tethered photography, upload to Frame.io, or FTP upload. Ready for tethered photography, upload to Frame.io, or FTP upload; pictures awaiting upload. Overview The EVF/LCD Displays The status of the connection to computers, Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like is also shown by an icon in the electronic viewfinder or LCD monitor. Icon Connection status No network connection. Connected to network but not to computer tethered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server. Ready for tethered photography, FTP upload, or upload to Frame.io. Network/USB Setting Menus 8 245 Overview Connection Setting Profiles Connection setting profiles contain information on both network settings and the type of connection used. You can connect to computers and smartphones by selecting the associated profile. Selecting a Connection Setting Profile To select a connection setting profile, press MENU/OK and choose SELECT CONNECTION SETTING in the I (network/USB setting) tab. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM NOT CREATED NOT CREATED N For tethered photography via wireless LAN, you will first need to create Network/USB Setting Menus 8 and save a new connection setting profile by following the instructions of a wizard displayed by selecting CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING. Saving Connection Setting Profiles To create a connection setting profile containing information on network/USB settings and the type of connection used, select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. Choose CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD, select the desired network/USB settings, and save the resulting profile (P 313). CREATE USING WIZARD SMARTPHONE APP USB CARD READER WEBCAM PRINTER PRINT TETHER SHOOTING CONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP 246 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® to copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera remotely while previewing the view through the lens in the smartphone display. N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when copying pictures to the smartphone. Installing Smartphone Apps Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smartphone app. Visit the following website and install the desired apps on your phone. N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system. Connecting to a Smartphone Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®. Network/USB Setting Menus https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/ 8 1 Press DISP/BACK while shooting information is displayed. N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the DISP/BACK button during playback. 247 2 Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Bluetooth Bluetooth 3 Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth PAIRING Bluetooth ON/OFF 4 Network/USB Setting Menus 8 Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone with the camera. More information is available at the following website: https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/ When pairing is complete, the camera and smartphone will automatically connect via Bluetooth. A smartphone icon and a white Bluetooth icon will appear in the camera display when a connection is established. N • Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automatically connect to the camera when the app is launched. • Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smartphone reduces the drain on the battery. 248 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) Using the Smartphone App Before launching the smartphone app, choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. N Before proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF. Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using the smartphone app. N More information is available from the following website: https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/ N • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will continue even while the camera is off. • Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu enables compression, reducing file size for upload (P 322). • Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/ SMARTPHONE SETTING > SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB setting menu. 249 Network/USB Setting Menus Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired device. 8 Selecting Pictures for Upload in the Playback Menu Use TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER to select pictures for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via Bluetooth®. 1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER. N Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking from all pictures before proceeding. 2 Network/USB Setting Menus 8 3 Mark pictures for upload. Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to mark them for upload. • To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK before marking begins. • To select all pictures, press the Q button. • Selecting any two pictures with the AEL button also selects all pictures between them. Press DISP/BACK and select START TRANSFER. The selected pictures will be uploaded. 250 SELECT IMAGE FRAME SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE SELECT FINISH/SETTING SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER START TRANSFER FILTERING SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND START TRANSFER Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth) Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog. • To display only pictures that meet selected criteria, choose FILTERING. • To switch to the memory card in the other slot, choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER START TRANSFER FILTERING SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT FILTERING THE IMAGE WITH CONDITIONS O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upload marking. and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will continue even while the camera is off. • When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button. 251 Network/USB Setting Menus N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures. • The following cannot be selected for upload: - Protected pictures - Movies - RAW images - “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras) • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF 8 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload pictures from the camera. Copying Pictures to a Smartphone Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB, select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. For Customers Using Android Devices How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB connector with which your smartphone is equipped. Network/USB Setting Menus Type-C Use the supplied USB cable. Supplied USB cable Type-C connector (male) 8 252 Type-C connector (male) Connecting to Smartphones (USB) Micro-B Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable. Third-party USB cable Type-C connector (male) USB OTG cable Micro-B connector (male) Type-A connector (male) with a USB Type-C–to– Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the “Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and move on to the next step. 4 On your smartphone, tap the notification “Connected to USB PTP”. 5 From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”. The app will automatically start and allow you to import photos and movies to your smartphone. N If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on the app, please try again from step 3. 253 Network/USB Setting Menus O • The smartphone must support USB OTG. • The desired results cannot be achieved Type-A connector (female) 8 For Customers Using iOS Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter. Third-party USB cable Type-C connector (male) Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter Use an Apple Lightning to USB Camera Adapter Type-A connector (male) Network/USB Setting Menus 8 1 Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable. Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your smartphone. O • A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors. • The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to– Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter. 254 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) Connecting the Camera and Computer 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 4 5 Turn the camera off. Turn the computer on. Connect a USB cable. O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be suitable for data transfer. 6 7 Network/USB Setting Menus USB connector (Type-C) 8 Turn the camera on. Copy pictures to your computer. • Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or other software. Use a card reader to copy files over 4 GB in size. • Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using apps supplied with the operating system. 255 Connecting to Smartphones (USB) O • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable. • When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in- Network/USB Setting Menus 8 serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard. • Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before connecting the camera. • If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted, there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be unable to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer pictures. • Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning the camera off. • Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card. • Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards. • In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a network server using the software in the same way as on a standalone computer. • Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or disconnect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has ceased to be displayed. • The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet connection. 256 Using the Camera as a Webcam The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a webcam. 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 3 Choose 6: USB WEBCAM for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 4 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 255). Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a webcam. Network/USB Setting Menus 8 257 instax SHARE Printers Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE printers. Establishing a Connection Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and password. Network/USB Setting Menus The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is “1111”. If you have already chosen a different password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. 8 258 instax SHARE Printers Printing Pictures 1 Choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 2 3 Turn the printer on. Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer. PRINTER PRINT instax-12345678 CONNECTING FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234 CANCEL 4 PRINTER PRINT 100-0020 SET instax-12345678 CANCEL N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed. • The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD monitor. • The displays may vary depending on the printer connected. 5 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start. Network/USB Setting Menus Use the focus stick (focus lever) to display the picture you want to print, then press MENU/OK. 8 259 Tethered Photography The camera can be controlled remotely and photographs taken from a computer connected via USB or wireless or wired LAN. • Tethered Photography via USB (P 260) • Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN (P 262) • Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 267) Tethered Photography via USB Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photography. Network/USB Setting Menus 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose either 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. O • If 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho- tography will be enabled automatically when the computer to which the camera is connected is turned on. When the computer is off or not connected, tethered photography will be suspended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card. • If the camera is disconnected from the computer while 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to function in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded. 8 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 255). 260 Tethered Photography 4 Take pictures via tethered photography. Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in” or “FUJIFILM X Acquire”. N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/ • Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/ Network/USB Setting Menus 8 261 Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN Connect to a wireless LAN to use a computer on the network for tethered photography. 1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and choose TETHERED SHOOTING (P 313). 2 Select CREATE NEW. N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select from a list of existing connection setting profiles. Network/USB Setting Menus 3 TETHER SHOOTING CREATE NEW SELECT FROM LIST CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD Press MENU/OK when prompted. SELECT COMM SETTING SELECT COMM SETTING TO USE THIS FUNCTION NEXT 4 Select WIRELESS LAN. 8 BACK SELECT COMM SETTING USB WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN TETHER SHOOTING ON WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD 5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new communication setting profile. N You can also select or edit existing profiles. 262 COMM SETTING USB WIFI_1 WIFI_2 WIFI_3 WIFI_4 WIFI_5 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW Tethered Photography 6 7 Adjust wireless LAN settings. • ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Simple Access Point Connections” (P 264). • IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265). WIRELESS LAN After adjusting wireless LAN settings, select NEXT. WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT 8 COMM SETTING NAME SET ENTER 9 Save the connection setting profile. Press MENU/OK. CANCEL EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME SAVE THE SETTING AS A CONNECTION SETTING Network/USB Setting Menus Name the communication setting profile. 8 NEXT 10 Select CREATE NEW. BACK SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM CREATE NEW 263 11 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING SET 12 Choose SELECT. N The connection setting profile can also be selected later using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 13 Network/USB Setting Menus 8 SETTING COMPLETE PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING" SELECT SKIP Take pictures remotely from the computer. Use software that supports tethered photography. N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/ • Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/ Simple Access Point Connections Connect to a computer for tethered photography using the simple setup feature on your wireless LAN router. 1 Select SIMPLE SETUP. N To select a wireless LAN router or en- ter the router SSID manually, choose MANUAL SETUP. 264 ACCESS POINT SETTING SIMPLE SETUP MANUAL SETUP SET UP CONNECTION TO DESTINATION PC (SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION) Tethered Photography 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to ready the wireless LAN router. N You also have the option of connect- ing using a PIN. Display the camera PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up and enter it on the wireless LAN router. 3 Press MENU/OK when setup is complete. SIMPLE SETUP PUSH WPS BUTTON ON Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING CONNECT BY PIN CODE CANCEL MANUAL SETUP REGISTRATION COMPLETED END 1 Select MANUAL. N Select AUTO to assign the camera an IP address automatically. 2 Enter an IP address. WIRELESS LA LAN POINT SETTING ACCESS PO P AUTO IP ADDRES ADDRESS SS SETTING MANUAL NEXT Network/USB Setting Menus Connecting Using an IP Address Connect to a computer for tethered photography using a manually-created network/USB setting profile giving the IP address and other network settings. 000.000.000.000 8 IP ADDRESS SETTING IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY ADDRESS DNS SERVER ADDRESS 265 • Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP address. • Select SUBNET MASK and enter a subnet mask. • Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and enNetwork/USB Setting Menus ter a gateway address. IP ADDRESS SET ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL SUBNET MASK SET GATEWAY ADDRESS SET ENTER • Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS and enter a DNS server address. CANCEL DNS SERVER ADDRESS SET 8 ENTER 266 CANCEL Tethered Photography Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet) Connect to wired LANs (Ethernet networks) for tethered photography using network computers. 1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into the camera’s LAN connector. 2 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and choose TETHERED SHOOTING. 3 Select CREATE NEW. N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select 4 CREATE NEW SELECT FROM LIST CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD Press MENU/OK when prompted. SELECT COMM SETTING SELECT COMM SETTING TO USE THIS FUNCTION NEXT 5 Select WIRED LAN. BACK SELECT COMM SETTING Network/USB Setting Menus from a list of existing connection setting profiles. TETHER SHOOTING 8 USB WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN TETHER SHOOTING ON WIRED LAN CONNECTION IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD 267 6 Select CREATE NEW to create a new communication setting profile. COMM SETTING USB WIFI_1 WIFI_2 WIFI_3 N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_4 files. WIFI_5 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW 7 Network/USB Setting Menus 8 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. • Select AUTO to use an IP address assigned by the network. • Select MANUAL to choose the IP address manually as described in “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265). IP ADDRESS SETTING Select NEXT to proceed after adjusting IP address settings. IP ADDRESS SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO NEXT IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO NEXT 9 Name the communication setting profile. COMM SETTING NAME SET 8 ENTER 10 Save the connection setting profile. Press MENU/OK. CANCEL EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME SAVE THE SETTING AS A CONNECTION SETTING NEXT 268 BACK Tethered Photography 11 Select CREATE NEW. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM CREATE NEW 12 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING SET 13 Choose SELECT. connection setting profile can also be selected later using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 14 PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING" SELECT SKIP Take pictures remotely from the computer. Use software that supports tethered photography. N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/ • Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/ Network/USB Setting Menus N The SETTING COMPLETE 8 269 Uploading Files to Frame.io Upload files to Frame.io (P 425). • Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 270) • Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 272) N Confirm that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date before proceeding. Connecting via Wireless LAN Connect to Frame.io via wireless LAN. 1 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud > CONNECT. Frame.io Camera to Cloud CONNECT DISCONNECT SELECT FILE TYPE UPLOAD SETTING Network/USB Setting Menus 8 UPLOAD STATUS NETWORK Frame.io PROJECT USER 2 Select WIRELESS LAN. NOT CONNECTED CONNECT WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN GET PAIRING CODE NETWORK Frame.io PROJECT USER 3 Select ACCESS POINT SETTING. Select IP ADDRESS SETTING to choose the IP address manually as described in “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 273). 270 NOT CONNECTED WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING FINISH Uploading Files to Frame.io 4 Select SIMPLE SETUP. N To select a wireless LAN router or en- ter the router SSID manually, choose MANUAL SETUP. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to ready the wireless LAN router. N You also have the option of connect- ing using a PIN. Display the camera PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up and enter it on the wireless LAN router. Press MENU/OK when setup is complete. SIMPLE SETUP MANUAL SETUP SET UP CONNECTION TO DESTINATION PC (SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION) SIMPLE SETUP PUSH WPS BUTTON ON Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING CONNECT BY PIN CODE CANCEL MANUAL SETUP REGISTRATION COMPLETED END 7 Once connected, select GET PAIRING CODE. A pairing code will be displayed. WIRELESS LAN AAAAAA003 SUCCESS GO TO Frame.io AND ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT CHANGE NETWORK GET PAIRING CODE FINISH 8 Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and enter the pairing code displayed on the camera. 9 Upload files to Frame.io (P 275). 271 Network/USB Setting Menus 6 ACCESS POINT SETTING 8 Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) Connect to Frame.io via wired LAN (Ethernet). 1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into the camera’s LAN connector. 2 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud > CONNECT. Frame.io Camera to Cloud CONNECT DISCONNECT SELECT FILE TYPE UPLOAD SETTING UPLOAD STATUS NETWORK Frame.io PROJECT USER 3 Select WIRED LAN. NOT CONNECTED CONNECT Network/USB Setting Menus WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN GET PAIRING CODE NETWORK Frame.io PROJECT USER 4 8 5 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. • Select AUTO to use an IP address assigned by the network. • Select MANUAL to choose the IP address manually as described in “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 273). Once connected, select GET PAIRING CODE. A pairing code will be displayed. 272 NOT CONNECTED IP ADDRESS SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING FINISH WIRED LAN AAAAAA003 SUCCESS GO TO Frame.io AND ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT CHANGE NETWORK GET PAIRING CODE FINISH Uploading Files to Frame.io 6 Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and enter the pairing code displayed on the camera. 7 Upload files to Frame.io (P 275). Connecting Using an IP Address Connect to Frame.io using a manually-created network/USB setting profile giving the IP address and other network settings. 1 Select MANUAL. N Select AUTO to assign the camera an IP address automatically. Enter an IP address. ACCESS PO P POINT SETTING AUTO IP ADDRES ADDRESS SS SETTING MANUAL NEXT 000.000.000.000 Network/USB Setting Menus 2 WIRELESS LA LAN IP ADDRESS SETTING IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK GATEWAY ADDRESS DNS SERVER ADDRESS • Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP address. IP ADDRESS SET 8 • Select SUBNET MASK and enter a subnet mask. ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL SUBNET MASK SET 273 • Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and enter a gateway address. GATEWAY ADDRESS SET ENTER • Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS and enter a DNS server address. CANCEL DNS SERVER ADDRESS SET ENTER CANCEL Network/USB Setting Menus Connection Status The status of the connection to Frame.io is shown by an icon in the electronic viewfinder or LCD monitor. Icon (white) 8 (amber) (gray) (red) 274 Connection status Connected to Frame.io. Camera has temporarily suspended upload to Frame.io. To resume, select Frame.io Camera to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > TRANSFER/ SUSPEND > TRANSFER. Not connected to Frame.io. Frame.io server has set camera status to “paused”. To restore connection, clear “paused” status using computer or other device. Uploading Files to Frame.io Uploading Items to Frame.io Uploading Selected Items Using “Frame.io Camera to Cloud” 1 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud in network/USB settings menu. 2 Select UPLOAD SETTING > SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER. UPLOAD SETTING SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER TRANSFER/SUSPEND IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF ROOT CERTIFICATE NETWORK Frame.io PROJECT USER WIRELESS LAN CONNECTED AAAAAAAA AAAAAAAA io using a computer or other device. Note that some characters may not display correctly, in which case they will be replaced by question marks (“?”). 3 SELECT IMAGE Mark items for upload. Highlight photos and movies and press MENU/OK to mark them for upload. • To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only items that meet selected criteria, press DISP/ BACK before marking begins. • To select all items, press the Q button. • Selecting any two items with the AEL button also selects all items between them. FRAME SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE SELECT FINISH/SETTING 275 Network/USB Setting Menus N • The NETWORK field shows how the camera is connected to the network and the Frame.io field, the status of the connection to Frame.io. • The PROJECT and USER fields show information supplied to Frame. 8 4 Press DISP/BACK and select START TRANSFER. The selected items will be uploaded to Frame.io. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER START TRANSFER FILTERING SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND START TRANSFER BACK Filtering Items/Choosing a Slot To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only items that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the selection dialog. • To display only items that meet selected criteria, choose FILTERING. • To switch to the memory card in the other slot, choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER START TRANSFER FILTERING SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT FILTERING THE IMAGE WITH CONDITIONS Network/USB Setting Menus BACK O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upload marking. N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 items. • If ON is selected for Frame.io Camera to Cloud > IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is off. 8 276 Uploading Files to Frame.io Uploading Photos and Movies as They Are Taken Photos and movies shot with ON selected for Frame.io Camera to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB setting menu are automatically marked for upload. Selecting Photos and Movies for Upload During Playback If HFrame.io TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can mark files for upload or change or remove their upload marking using the Fn1 button during playback. Network/USB Setting Menus 8 277 Uploading Files via FTP You can connect the camera to an existing FTP server and upload pictures via FTP. Connecting to FTP Servers • Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 278) • Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 281) Connecting via Wireless LAN Connect to an FTP server via wireless LAN. Network/USB Setting Menus 1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and choose FTP TRANSFER. 2 Select CREATE NEW. N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select from a list of existing connection setting profiles. 3 FTP TRANSFER CREATE NEW SELECT FROM LIST CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD Press MENU/OK when prompted. SELECT COMM SETTING 8 SELECT COMM SETTING TO USE THIS FUNCTION NEXT 278 BACK Uploading Files via FTP 4 Select WIRELESS LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING TRANSFER IMAGES TO FTP SERVER VIA WIRELESS LAN 5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new communication setting profile. N You can also select or edit existing profiles. 6 USB WIFI_1 WIFI_2 WIFI_3 WIFI_4 WIFI_5 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW Adjust wireless LAN settings. • ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Simple Access Point Connections” (P 264). • IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265). WIRELESS LAN After adjusting wireless LAN settings, select NEXT. WIRELESS LAN Network/USB Setting Menus 7 COMM SETTING ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT 8 8 Name the communication setting profile. COMM SETTING NAME SET ENTER CANCEL 279 9 When prompted, press MENU/OK and adjust settings for connection to the FTP server (P 285). FTP SERVER SETTING SELECT CREATE NEW IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN CREATED NEXT 10 Save the connection setting profile when adjustments to settings are complete. Press MENU/OK. EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME SAVE THE SETTING AS A CONNECTION SETTING NEXT 11 Select CREATE NEW. BACK BACK SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING Network/USB Setting Menus USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM CREATE NEW 12 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING SET 8 280 Uploading Files via FTP 13 Select OK to test the connection. When a prompt is displayed stating that the test was successful, press MENU/OK. TEST THE CONNECTION? OK NO N If the test ends in failure, check the communication setting profile and network settings. 14 Choose SELECT to finish creating the connection setting profile. SETTING COMPLETE PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING" N The connection setting profile can also be selected later using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. Upload pictures to the FTP server (P 288). Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) Connect to an FTP server via wired LAN (Ethernet). 1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into the camera’s LAN connector. 2 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and choose FTP TRANSFER. 3 Select CREATE NEW. N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select from a list of existing connection setting profiles. FTP TRANSFER CREATE NEW SELECT FROM LIST CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD 281 Network/USB Setting Menus 15 SELECT SKIP 8 4 Press MENU/OK when prompted. SELECT COMM SETTING SELECT COMM SETTING TO USE THIS FUNCTION NEXT 5 Select WIRED LAN. BACK SELECT COMM SETTING WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING TRANSFER IMAGES TO FTP SERVER VIA WIRED LAN 6 Network/USB Setting Menus Select CREATE NEW to create a new communication setting profile. COMM SETTING USB WIFI_1 WIFI_2 N You can also select or edit existing pro- WIFI_3 WIFI_4 files. 7 8 8 WIFI_5 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. • Select AUTO to use an IP address assigned by the network. • Select MANUAL to choose the IP address manually as described in “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265). IP ADDRESS SETTING Select NEXT to proceed after adjusting IP address settings. IP ADDRESS SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT 282 AUTO NEXT AUTO Uploading Files via FTP 9 Name the communication setting profile. COMM SETTING NAME SET ENTER 10 When prompted, press MENU/OK and adjust settings for connection to the FTP server (P 285). CANCEL FTP SERVER SETTING SELECT CREATE NEW IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN CREATED NEXT 11 EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME SAVE THE SETTING AS A CONNECTION SETTING NEXT 12 Select CREATE NEW. BACK SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE Network/USB Setting Menus Save the connection setting profile when adjustments to settings are complete. Press MENU/OK. BACK USB WEBCAM 8 CREATE NEW 13 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING SET 283 14 Select OK to test the connection. When a prompt is displayed stating that the test was successful, press MENU/OK. TEST THE CONNECTION? OK NO N If the test ends in failure, check the communication setting profile and network settings. 15 Choose SELECT to finish creating the connection setting profile. SETTING COMPLETE PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING" N The connection setting profile can also be selected later using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. Network/USB Setting Menus 16 Upload pictures to the FTP server (P 288). 8 284 SELECT SKIP Uploading Files via FTP Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers Adjust settings for connection to the destination FTP server. 1 Select CREATE NEW in the FTP server settings display. FTP SERVER SETTING N You can also select or edit existing set- CREATE NEW CREATE NEW tings. 2 Choose an FTP server type. CREATE NEW CREATE NEW FTP SERVER TYPE FTP FTPS SFTP Enter the FTP server address. FTP SERVER ADDRESS SET ENTER 4 Enter the FTP server port number. CANCEL PORT NUMBER Network/USB Setting Menus 3 8 SET ENTER CANCEL 285 5 Choose whether to use a proxy server. In this case we’ll choose DISABLE. N Choose ENABLE to enter the address PROXY SERVER ENABLE DISABLE and port number for a proxy server. 6 Choose whether to enable PASV mode. PASSIVE MODE ENABLE DISABLE 7 Network/USB Setting Menus Select USER NAME & PASSWORD. Enter the user name and password used for login to the FTP server. N • For connection to servers that do not LOGIN ANONYMOUS USER NAME & PASSWORD require a user name and password, select ANONYMOUS. • Selecting FTPS for FTP SERVER TYPE lets you choose the authentication method. If desired, you can load a self-signed root certificate using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > ROOT CERTIFICATE. 8 8 Choose the destination folder. • Choose ROOT FOLDER to upload pictures to the server’s root directory. • To select a different folder, choose SPECIFY FOLDER. 286 SPECIFY TARGET FOLDER ROOT FOLDER SPECIFY FOLDER Uploading Files via FTP 9 10 Choose the procedure used when the destination contains files with the same names as the pictures selected for upload. • Select YES to overwrite the existing files. • Select NO to rename the uploaded files by adding numbers at the ends of the file names (e.g., “DSCF0001_ (0).JPG”). OVERWRITE SAME FILE NAME Name the FTP server settings. The chosen name will appear in the FTP server list. FTP SERVER NAME YES NO SET Network/USB Setting Menus 8 287 Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers Select pictures for upload to an FTP server. • Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING (P 288) • Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken (P 290) • Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback (P 290) Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING 1 Select FTP OPTIONAL SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER Network/USB Setting Menus AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER SELECT FILE TYPE CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER TRANSFER/SUSPEND SELECT IMAGE AND TRANSFER TO SELECTED FTP SERVER 3 Select TRANSFER. N If you choose PRIORITY TRANSFER, any pictures you then select will be uploaded to the FTP server before pictures selected using TRANSFER. SELECT IM MA & TRANSFER IMAGE AUTO IMAG G TRANSFER ORDER IMAGE SELECT FI IL TYPE FILE TRANSFER CAPTION FO F FOR FTP TRANSFER PRIORITY TRANSFER TRANSFER/SUSPEND TRANSFER R/ SELECT IMAGE A AND TRANSFER TO SELECTED FT FFTP SERVER 8 4 SELECT IMAGE Mark pictures for upload. Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to mark them for upload. • To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK before marking begins. • To select all pictures, press the Q button. • Selecting any two pictures with the AEL button also selects all pictures between them. 288 FRAME SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE SELECT FINISH/SETTING Uploading Files via FTP 5 Press DISP/BACK and select START TRANSFER. The selected pictures will be uploaded to the FTP server. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER START TRANSFER FILTERING SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND START TRANSFER BACK Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog. • To display only pictures that meet selected criteria, choose FILTERING. • To switch to the memory card in the other slot, choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER START TRANSFER FILTERING SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT FILTERING THE IMAGE WITH CONDITIONS O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upload marking. N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 pictures. • If ON is selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is off. Network/USB Setting Menus BACK 8 289 Uploading Files via FTP Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken Pictures taken with ON selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB setting menu are automatically marked for upload. Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback If b FTP TRANSFER ORDER or c FTP PRIORITY TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can mark pictures for upload or change or remove their upload marking using the Fn1 button during playback. Network/USB Setting Menus 8 290 RAW Processing Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the camera’s image processing engine when processing RAW pictures on a computer. Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 255). 4 Launch X RAW STUDIO. RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/ Network/USB Setting Menus 1 8 291 Saving and Loading Settings Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers using FUJIFILM X Acquire. Network/USB Setting Menus 1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. 2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn the camera on (P 255). 4 Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire. Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X Acquire. N Visit the website below for information on the software used. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/ 8 292 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser The camera supports remote movie recording. You can connect to up to four cameras using a web browser on a computer or tablet and record movies or adjust camera settings. Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser You can connect to the camera from a web browser on a computer or tablet and control it remotely. Web browser Network/USB Setting Menus Wired LAN (Ethernet)/ wireless LAN Wired LAN (Ethernet)/ wireless LAN 8 Computer/tablet 293 Before recording movies remotely, you will need to create a connection setting profile for use when connecting the camera to a computer or tablet via wireless or wired LAN. • Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 294) • Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 299) Connecting via Wireless LAN Create a connection setting profile for use when connecting the camera to a computer or tablet via wireless LAN. Network/USB Setting Menus 1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and choose REMOTE REC FUNCTION. 2 Select CREATE NEW. N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select from a list of existing connection setting profiles. 3 REMOTE REC FUNCTION CREATE NEW SELECT FROM LIST CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD Press MENU/OK when prompted. SELECT COMM SETTING 8 SELECT COMM SETTING TO USE THIS FUNCTION NEXT 4 Select WIRELESS LAN. SELECT COMM SETTING WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN CONNECT TO NETWORK VIA WIRELESS LAN 294 BACK Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser 5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new connection setting profile. N You can also select or edit existing profiles. COMM SETTING USB WIFI_1 WIFI_2 WIFI_3 WIFI_4 WIFI_5 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW 6 Adjust wireless LAN settings. • ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Simple Access Point Connections” (P 264). • IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265). WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT (for example, one that operates in the 5 GHz band). 7 After adjusting wireless LAN settings, select NEXT. WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT 8 Name the communication setting profile. COMM SETTING NAME SET Network/USB Setting Menus N We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point 8 ENTER CANCEL 295 9 10 Create a user name and password for use when connecting to the camera from a computer or tablet. Press MENU/OK. Enter a user name. USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING USER NAME & PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER NEXT BACK ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL USER NAME SET 11 Enter a password. PASSWORD Network/USB Setting Menus SET 12 Choose a server type. N If you choose HTTPS, you will need to import a root certificate into the browser on your computer or tablet (P 298). 8 13 The camera will display the settings you selected. Press MENU/OK. N You will need this information when connecting to the camera from a computer or tablet. 296 SERVER TYPE HTTP HTTPS USER NAME PASSWORD SERVER TYPE END EDIT Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser 14 Save the connection setting profile. Press MENU/OK. EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME SAVE THE SETTING AS A CONNECTION SETTING NEXT 15 Select CREATE NEW. BACK SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM CREATE NEW 16 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING 17 Choose SELECT. N The connection setting profile can also be selected later using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 18 SETTING COMPLETE PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING" SELECT SKIP Network/USB Setting Menus SET 8 Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303). 297 Connecting via HTTPS If you selected HTTPS for SERVER TYPE, you will need to import a root certificate into the browser on your computer or tablet. Instructions on downloading and installing a root certificate are available from the following website: https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/rootcer/ Network/USB Setting Menus 8 298 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) Create a connection setting profile for use when connecting the camera to a computer or tablet via wired LAN (Ethernet). 1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu and choose REMOTE REC FUNCTION. 2 Select CREATE NEW. N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to select from a list of existing connection setting profiles. CREATE NEW SELECT FROM LIST CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD Press MENU/OK when prompted. SELECT COMM SETTING SELECT COMM SETTING TO USE THIS FUNCTION NEXT 4 Select WIRED LAN. BACK SELECT COMM SETTING WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN 8 CONNECT TO NETWORK VIA WIRELESS LAN 5 Select CREATE NEW to create a new communication setting profile. N You can also select or edit existing profiles. Network/USB Setting Menus 3 REMOTE REC FUNCTION COMM SETTING USB WIFI_1 WIFI_2 WIFI_3 WIFI_4 WIFI_5 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW 299 6 7 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING. • Select AUTO to use an IP address assigned by the network. • Select MANUAL to choose the IP address manually as described in “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265). IP ADDRESS SETTING Select NEXT to proceed after adjusting IP address settings. IP ADDRESS SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO NEXT IP ADDRESS SETTING AUTO NEXT Network/USB Setting Menus 8 Name the communication setting profile. COMM SETTING NAME SET ENTER 9 8 10 Create a user name and password for use when connecting to the camera from a computer or tablet. Press MENU/OK. Enter a user name. CANCEL USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING USER NAME & PASSWORD IS REQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER NEXT BACK ENTER CANCEL USER NAME SET 300 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser 11 Enter a password. PASSWORD SET ENTER 12 Choose a server type. N If you choose HTTPS, you will need to import a root certificate into the browser on your computer or tablet (P 298). 13 N You will need this information when connecting to the camera from a computer or tablet. 14 Save the connection setting profile. Press MENU/OK. HTTP HTTPS USER NAME PASSWORD SERVER TYPE END EDIT EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME SAVE THE SETTING AS A CONNECTION SETTING NEXT 15 Select CREATE NEW. Network/USB Setting Menus The camera will display the settings you selected. Press MENU/OK. CANCEL SERVER TYPE 8 BACK SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM CREATE NEW 301 16 Name the connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING SET 17 Choose SELECT. N The connection setting profile can also be selected later using SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. 18 SETTING COMPLETE PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTING FROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING" SELECT SKIP Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303). Network/USB Setting Menus 8 302 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet Connect to the camera from a web browser on a computer or tablet. N We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point (for example, one that operates in the 5 GHz band). Connecting the first camera Connect by using a web browser to enter the IP address or using a camera app to scan the QR code displayed by the camera. Connecting using an IP address 1 3 An entry screen appears. Enter the user name and password. The remote recording display will appear in the browser. 8 Please sign-in to the camera USER NAME: PASSWORD: OK Network/USB Setting Menus 2 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/ USB setting menu. The IP address of the camera is displayed. Launch a web browser on your comXXXXXXXXX......... puter or tablet and enter the camera’s IP address in the address bar. To connect to a camera with an IP address of 192.168.0.11, for example, enter “http://192.168.0.11”. Cancel 303 Connecting by scanning a QR code 1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/ USB setting menu. A QR code is displayed. 2 Launch the camera application on the tablet and scan the QR code. The web browser launches, and the remote recording display appears. Connecting a second or subsequent camera Either enter the IP address in the remote recording display in the web browser or scan the QR code to connect. Network/USB Setting Menus N When you connect a second or subsequent camera, set the same SERVER TYPE as the first camera beforehand (P 298). Connecting using an IP address 1 2 8 3 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/ USB setting menu. The IP address of the camera is displayed. Click or tap the thumbnail of the + mark in the “Choose camera” area of the remote recording display. An entry screen appears. Enter the camera’s IP address and an account name and password. The remote recording display will appear in the browser. 304 Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in Address: USER NAME E: Connect via QR Code PASS PASSWORD: PASSWO ASSWO S OK Cancel Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser Connecting by scanning a QR code N To connect a second or subsequent camera by scanning a QR code, set SERVER TYPE of the first camera and second and subsequent cameras to HTTPS in advance. 1 2 Tap “Connect via QR Code” to scan the QR code displayed by the camera. The remote recording display will appear in the browser. Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in Address: USER NAME E: Connect via QR Code PASSW PASSWO PASSWORD: S OK Cancel Disconnecting a second or subsequent camera To end a connection after adding a camera, select the “remove connected device” option in the “Remote recording” menu and click or tap the thumbnail for the camera you want to remove. 305 Network/USB Setting Menus 3 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/ USB setting menu. A QR code is displayed. Tap the thumbnail of the + mark in the “Choose camera” area. 8 The Remote Recording Display The controls available in the remote recording display are detailed below. N The display layout varies with the size of the computer or tablet screen, among other factors. Overview K A A Network/USB Setting Menus B J I H GF 8 306 E D C Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser A Item Camera settings B Choose for REC/STOP C STOP button D REC button E Choose camera Check button for movies in F memory card G Camera settings (advanced) I Display mode button J Remote recording menu K Camera lock button N If you end the connection to a camera while it is locked, its controls will remain disabled, in which case you will need to turn the camera off. Network/USB Setting Menus H Screen lock button Description Adjust settings for the current camera. Choose the camera or cameras to which the selected action (starting or stopping recording) will apply. Stop movie recording. Start movie recording. A list of thumbnails showing the views through the lenses of the connected cameras. Click or tap a thumbnail to select a camera to control. View the movies on the memory card in the current camera. Adjust (advanced) settings for the current camera. Enable or disable the controls in the remote recording display. Switch displays. Adjust remote recording settings (P 309). Lock or unlock the current camera, enabling or disabling its controls. 8 307 Choose Camera The views through the lenses of the connected cameras are shown in a thumbnail list. Click or tap a thumbnail to select a camera to control. A B B D C Setting Network/USB Setting Menus A Recording time available B Card slot options C Battery level 8 D Thumbnail frame 308 Description The remaining recording time. When the time remaining grows short, the thumbnail will flash and the recording time will be displayed in red. Camera storage settings. The icon for the current slot is shown in orange. The display turns red if the camera is unable to record to the current card. The battery level. The thumbnail will flash when the battery runs low. A frame appears around the thumbnail for the current camera. Regardless of whether they are currently selected, cameras that are currently recording are highlighted in red or, during high-speed recording, in green. Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser Remote Recording Menu Adjust remote recording settings. Show histogram Hide or view the histogram. Show microphone level Hide or view the microphone recording level. Show WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE Hide or view the waveform/vectorscope (P 190). Show tool bar Hide or view the browser toolbar. N • Prioritizing image quality maximizes image quality but may result in display lag. • Prioritizing real-time display keeps display lag to a minimum regardless of such factors as connection speed. Light mode/Dark mode Switch between the light- and dark-mode remote recording displays. Stop the camera connection Click or tap a thumbnail in the “Choose camera” area to end the connection to the selected camera. 309 Network/USB Setting Menus Display with Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority Choose how you prefer the view through the lens to be displayed, giving priority either to image quality or to ensuring that the picture updates in real time. 8 Recording Movies Remotely Start recording on one or more remote cameras or end recording on selected cameras without ending recording on others. Network/USB Setting Menus 8 1 The cameras to which the chosen action (starting or stopping recording) will apply can be selected in the “Choose for REC/STOP” area. Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the “Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selected cameras will be highlighted. 2 Click or tap the “REC button”. The selected cameras will start recording and their thumbnails will be highlighted in color. 3 To end recording, select the desired cameras in the “Choose for REC/STOP” area. Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the “Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selected cameras will be highlighted. 4 Click or tap the “STOP button”. The selected cameras will stop recording. Viewing Movies View movies recorded to the camera memory card. 1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area. 2 Click or tap the “Check button for movies in memory card”. The files on the camera memory card will be displayed. 310 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser Saving and Loading Camera Settings Save settings for connected cameras to the computer or tablet or load previously-saved settings. Saving Camera Settings Save camera settings to a settings file on the computer or tablet. 1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area. 2 Select “Backup” in the “Camera settings (advanced)” menu. Backup Click or tap “Save settings”. Settings for the selected camera will be saved to a settings file on the computer or tablet. Loading Saved Settings Load saved settings onto a selected camera. 1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area. 2 Select “Restore” in the “Camera settings (advanced)” menu. 8 Restore 3 Network/USB Setting Menus 3 Select the desired settings file and click or tap “Load settings”. The settings will be copied to the selected camera. N • The location and procedure for loading files varies with the computer or tablet. • Only files created with cameras of the same type can be used. 311 Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser Copying Settings to Other Cameras Settings can be copied to multiple cameras simultaneously. 1 Select the source camera in the “Choose camera” area. 2 Select “Copy” in the “Camera settings (advanced)” menu. Copy 3 Network/USB Setting Menus Select the destination cameras and click or tap “Copy”. The settings currently in effect on the source camera will be copied to the destination cameras. Copy N Only files created with cameras of the same type can be used. 8 312 Network/USB Setting Menus Adjust camera network and USB settings. To access network/USB settings from the shooting or playback display, press MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB setting) tab. NETWORK/USB SETTING CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING SELECT CONNECTION SETTING AIRPLANE MODE Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Frame.io Camera to Cloud FTP OPTIONAL SETTING USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING EXIT CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING Create or edit connection setting profiles. 1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu. CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING CREATE USING WIZARD EDIT/CHECK CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD Network/USB Setting Menus CREATE USING WIZARD Choose network/USB and communication settings for a connection setting profile. 8 313 2 Choose the desired network/USB settings. CREATE USING WIZARD SMARTPHONE APP USB CARD READER WEBCAM PRINTER PRINT TETHER SHOOTING CONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP N To use any of the following pre-existing connection setting profiles, choose SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. • 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING • 2: USB CARD READER • 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO • 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED • 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE • 6: USB WEBCAM Network/USB Setting Menus 8 3 4 Select CREATE NEW. Choosing a tethered photography option displays the options shown. To create a new profile, select CREATE NEW. TETHER SHOOTING CREATE NEW SELECT FROM LIST CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING USING WIZARD Adjust network/USB settings. For more information, refer to the section on the setting in question. • “Tethered Photography” (P 260) • “Uploading Pictures via FTP“ (P 278) • “Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser“ (P 293) N Saved connection setting profiles are marked by icons indicating the communication setting profile. 314 Network/USB Setting Menus EDIT/CHECK View or edit existing connection setting profiles. N The instructions that follow are devoted chiefly to choosing commu- nication settings for connection setting profiles used in tethered photography. 1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > EDIT/CHECK in the network/USB setting menu. CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING CREATE USING WIZARD EDIT/CHECK EDIT AND CHECK EXISTING CONNECTION SETTING 2 Choose a connection setting profile. to 6: USB WEBCAM) are not available. UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM NISHIAZABU STUDIO NOT CREATED 3 SELECT CONNECTION N SETTING Select EDIT/CHECK. UNIV USB B • To copy an existing connection setEDIT / CHECK USB B COPY ting profile, select COPY. Choosing USB B CONNECTION TEST USB B ERASE an existing profile as the destinaUSB B NISHIAZABU NIS SH STUDIO tion overwrites the profile selected NOT CREATED in Step 2. • To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST. • To delete the selected connection setting profile, select ERASE. 315 Network/USB Setting Menus N Options 1 to 6 (1: UNIVERSAL SETTING SELECT CONNECTION SETTING 8 4 Select COMM SETTING. 7: STUDIO_TETHER 2: WiFi_STUDIO FINISH EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME COMM SETTING FTP SERVER SETTING REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING N • To rename the connection setting profile, select EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME. • If the chosen connection setting profile is for FTP upload, select FTP SERVER SETTING to view or edit settings for connection to the FTP server (P 285). • If the chosen connection setting profile is for the remote record function, select REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING to view or edit settings for remote movie recording (P 296, 301). Network/USB Setting Menus 8 5 Choose an existing communication setting profile. N To create a new profile, select CREATE NEW. 6 Select EDIT/CHECK. • To save the selected communication setting profile to the current connection setting profile, choose SELECT. COMM SETTING USB WIFI_1 WIFI_2 WIFI_3 WIFI_4 WIFI_5 CREATE NEW CREATE NEW COMM SETTING TIN USB WIFI_1 WIFI__1 WIFI_2 WIFI__2 WIFI_3 WIFI__3 WIFI__4 WIFI_4 SELECT EDIT / CHECK COPY ERASE CONNECTION TEST WIFI_5 WIFI_ _5 CREATE CREA AT NEW CREATE CREA ATE NEW • To copy an existing communication setting profile, select COPY. Choosing an existing profile as the destination overwrites the profile selected in Step 5. • To delete the selected communication setting profile, select ERASE. Deleting a communication setting profile saved to a connection setting profile also deletes the connection setting profile. • To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST. 316 Network/USB Setting Menus 7 8 Review the settings displayed and select END to proceed without making changes. To edit settings, press the focus stick (focus lever) to the right. You can now edit the communication setting profile as described in “Simple Access Point Connections” (P 264) and “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265). After editing the communication setting profile, select NEXT. 2: WIFI_ODAIBA_MC3 NETWORK TYPE WIRELESS LAN SECURITY TYPE WPA3 SSID 123456789 IP ADDRESS SETTING MANUAL IP ADDRESS 255.255.255.255 SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.255 GATEWAY ADDRESS 255.255.255.255 DNS SERVER ADDRESS ABCDEFGHIJK END EDIT WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING NEXT Name the communication setting profile. COMM SETTING NAME SET ENTER 10 Choose SELECT to save the edited communication setting profile to the current connection setting profile. CANCEL 8 8: WIFI_ODAIBA_MC3 SELECT THIS COMM SETTING? SELECT SKIP 11 Select FINISH to end editing. 7: STUDIO_TETHER 2: Network/USB Setting Menus 9 WiFi_STUDIO FINISH EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME COMM SETTING FTP SERVER SETTING REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING 317 SELECT CONNECTION SETTING Select a connection setting profile. Profile Network/USB Setting Menus 8 Description Connect using the smartphone app or print pictures on 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING instax printers. Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone via 2: USB CARD READER USB and copy pictures from memory cards. 3: USB TETHER Control the camera and take photographs remotely. SHOOTING AUTO • Select 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO to automatically enable tethered photography when the computer to which the camera is connected is turned on. Tethered photography is disabled while the computer is off. 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED • If 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, the camera will continue to function in tethered photography mode even when not connected to a computer. Harness the power of the camera’s image processing en5: USB RAW CONV./ gine when processing RAW pictures on a computer, or BACKUP RESTORE save or load camera settings. Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a 6: USB WEBCAM webcam. 7–16: User-created Use network/USB settings saved using CREATE/EDIT profiles CONNECTION SETTING. 318 Network/USB Setting Menus Choosing a Connection Setting Profile Follow the steps below to use pre-existing or user-created connection setting profiles. 1 Choose SELECT CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB setting menu. NETWORK/USB SETTING CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING 7:STUDIO SELECT CONNECTION SETTING AIRPLANE MODE Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Frame.io Camera to Cloud FTP OPTIONAL SETTING USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING EXIT 2 Choose the desired connection setting profile. SELECT CONNECTION SETTING UNIVERSAL SETTING USB CARD READER USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO NISHIAZABU STUDIO AIRPLANE MODE Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetooth features. Options ON OFF Network/USB Setting Menus USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE USB WEBCAM 8 319 Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smartphone-related settings. N Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of the smartphone app. PAIRING REGISTRATION Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smartphone app has been installed. Network/USB Setting Menus 8 SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the camera has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO CONNECTION to exit without connecting. DELETE PAIRING REG. Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet. N The selected device will be removed from the pairing list. Bluetooth DEVICE LIST List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than the smartphone) or end pairing with selected devices. 320 Network/USB Setting Menus Bluetooth ON/OFF If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect with paired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app. Options ON OFF AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken. Options ON OFF Options ON OFF O Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app is running. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have not been updated for over 30 minutes. NAME Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default). 321 Network/USB Setting Menus SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC. Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data from paired smartphones or tablets. 8 IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures to paired smartphones or tablets even while off. Options ON OFF RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing file size for upload. ON T Network/USB Setting Menus 8 Options ON U OFF N • The pictures on the camera memory card are not affected. • Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M. When the setting is ON T or ON U, images are compressed to about 12 megapixels or 6 megapixels, respectively. The size after compression differs by the aspect ratio of the image. WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING Choose the band for wireless LAN connections. Options 2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n) 5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac) O • Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels in the 5 GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2 GHz (W52) band is permitted before selecting the 5 GHz option. • The options available vary with the country or region of sale. SELECT FILE TYPE Choose the format or formats used for upload. Pictures can be uploaded in JPEG format and/or HEIF. 322 Network/USB Setting Menus instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers. The Printer Name (SSID) and Password The printer name (SSID) can be found on the bottom of the printer; the default password is “1111”. If you have already chosen a different password to print from a smartphone, enter that password instead. CONNECT Connect to Frame.io. Option WIRELESS LAN WIRED LAN GET PAIRING CODE Description Connect via wireless LAN. Connect via wired LAN. View the pairing code for connection to the Frame.io project. N The pairing code can only be viewed when the camera is connected to Frame.io. DISCONNECT End the connection to the Frame.io project and terminate the network connection. 323 Network/USB Setting Menus Frame.io Camera to Cloud Adjust settings for use with Frame.io. 8 SELECT FILE TYPE Choose the types of files uploaded to Frame.io. You can select or deselect each file type individually. Options MOV - ProRes OTHER MOV/MP4 HEIF TIFF MOV - PROXY RAW JPEG UPLOAD SETTING Adjust settings Frame.io upload settings. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER Mark picture for upload. Network/USB Setting Menus AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER Select ON to automatically mark photos and movies for upload as they are taken. Options ON OFF TRANSFER/SUSPEND Pause or resume upload to Frame.io. Options TRANSFER 8 324 SUSPEND Network/USB Setting Menus IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF If ON is selected, upload of files to Frame.io will continue while the camera is off. Options ON OFF ROOT CERTIFICATE Copy a root certificate to the camera for use with Frame.io. Option Description LOAD FROM STORAGE Copy the root certificate from the camera memory card. MEDIA DELETE Delete the current root certificate. same root certificate. Changing one changes the other. UPLOAD STATUS View Frame.io upload status. TRANSFER QUEUE View a list of the files awaiting upload. RESET TRANSFER ORDER Remove upload marking from all files selected for upload to Frame.io. 325 Network/USB Setting Menus N Frame.io and FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > ROOT CERTIFICATE use the 8 FTP OPTIONAL SETTING Adjust settings for FTP upload. SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER Mark picture for upload (P 288). AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER Select ON to automatically mark pictures for upload as they are taken. Options ON Network/USB Setting Menus SELECT FILE TYPE Choose the types of files uploaded to the FTP server. You can select or deselect each file type individually. Options JPEG RAW HEIF TIFF MOV MP4 CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER Add captions to photos and movies during upload. Option 8 OFF DEFAULT CAPTION CREATED CAPTION NO CAPTION Description Add the caption selected for D SAVE DATA SETTING > DEFAULT CAPTION. Create new captions or select existing captions. Do not add captions to pictures during upload. TRANSFER/SUSPEND Pause or resume FTP upload. Options TRANSFER 326 SUSPEND Network/USB Setting Menus IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF If ON is selected, upload of pictures to the FTP server will continue while the camera is off. Options ON OFF FTP POWER SAVING If ON is selected, the network feature will turn off to save power when the upload of all pictures currently marked for transfer is complete. Marking additional pictures for upload turns the network feature on again. Options OFF ROOT CERTIFICATE Copy a unique root certificate to the camera for use when FTPS is selected for FTP SERVER TYPE (P 285). Option Description LOAD FROM MEMORY Copy the root certificate from the camera memory card. CARD DELETE Delete the current root certificate. N FTP upload and Frame.io Camera to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > ROOT CERTIFICATE use the same root certificate. Changing one changes the other. RESET FTP TRANSFER ORDER Remove upload marking from all pictures selected for upload to the FTP server in the current connection setting profile. 327 Network/USB Setting Menus ON 8 USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones, or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer. Option Description The camera switches between power delivery and data transAUTO fer automatically. POWER SUPPLY ON/ The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing COMM OFF the drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled. POWER SUPPLY The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from, OFF/COMM ON the connected device. O The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from Network/USB Setting Menus devices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected. N Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while the camera is off. 8 328 Network/USB Setting Menus INFORMATION View network-related settings. Option Description View the camera’s wireless and wired LAN Mac addresses and HARDWARE INFO IP addresses, and Bluetooth MAC address. TRANSFER ORDER View upload progress and the destination for files uploaded to STATUS Frame.io or via FTP. ERROR View the content of errors when a C or B icon is displayed DESCRIPTION (P 457). RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING Reset network/USB settings to default values. Network/USB Setting Menus 8 329 MEMO 330 The Setup Menus 331 USER SETTING Adjust basic camera settings. To access basic camera settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose USER SETTING. USER SETTING FORMAT bAREA SETTING DATE/TIME TIME DIFFERENCE x MY MENU SETTING F MY MENU SETTING SENSOR CLEANING EXIT FORMAT To format a memory card or USB-connected SSD: 1 2 Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab. Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and press MENU/OK. N An SSD connected to the USB connector can also be selected. 3 The Setup Menus 9 A confirmation dialog will be displayed. To format the memory card, highlight OK and press MENU/OK. N To exit without formatting the memory card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK. FORMAT FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK? ERASE ALL DATA OK CANCEL O • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the memory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a computer or other storage device. • Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting. N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing and holding the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding the b (Delete) button. 332 USER SETTING b AREA SETTING Adjust settings for your current time zone. AREA SETTING Choose your time zone from a map. DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Turn daylight saving time on or off. Option ON OFF Description Daylight saving time on. Daylight saving time off. DATE/TIME To set the camera clock: Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab. 3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. To change the order in which the year, month, and day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the focus stick up or down. The Setup Menus 1 2 9 333 TIME DIFFERENCE Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the difference between your local and home time zone: O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before selecting a local time zone using g LOCAL. 1 2 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local time zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete. N Select ON to enable daylight saving time. To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time zone, select h HOME. Options g LOCAL h HOME The Setup Menus N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three seconds when the camera is turned on. 9 334 USER SETTING Qa Choose a language. x MY MENU SETTING Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 377). F MY MENU SETTING Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 377). The Setup Menus 9 335 SENSOR CLEANING Remove dust from the camera image sensor. Option OK Description Clean the sensor immediately. Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is WHEN SWITCHED ON turned on. Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns WHEN SWITCHED OFF off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the camera turns off in playback mode). N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed using a blower (P 438). BATTERY AGE Check battery age. Age is expressed as a number between 0 and 4. The higher the number, the older the battery. BATTERY AGE The Setup Menus N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that batteries be replaced as they wear out. 9 336 USER SETTING RESET Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values. 1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK. Option Description Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values. Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values. Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME, SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and COPYRIGHT INFO to default values. Reset all settings other than custom white balance to INITIALIZE default values. 2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and press MENU/OK. The Setup Menus REGULATORY To view electronic copies of the product model number, and other certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the setup menu. 9 337 SOUND SETTING Make changes to camera sounds. To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SOUND SET-UP. SOUND SETTING AF BEEP VOL. SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. OPERATION VOL. FREC START/STOP VOLUME ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND EXIT AF BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. Options b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF. The Setup Menus Options b (high) 9 338 c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) SOUND SETTING OPERATION VOL. Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds. Options b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) F REC START/STOP VOLUME Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording. Options b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or electronic front-curtain shutter. Options b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) The Setup Menus 9 339 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic front-curtain shutter. i SOUND 1 Options j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3 s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound. Options b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute) s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter. i SOUND 1 The Setup Menus 9 340 Options j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3 SOUND SETTING PLAYBACK VOLUME Adjust the volume for movie playback. 0 1 2 3 4 Options 5 6 7 8 9 10 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies. Option Description XLR The camera plays audio recorded via external microphones connected via the XLR microphone adapter. CAMERA The camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in microphone or external microphones connected via the microphone jack. N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display by pressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever). The Setup Menus 9 341 SCREEN SETTING Make changes to display settings. To access display settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SCREEN SET-UP. SCREEN SETTING VIEW MODE SETTING EVF BRIGHTNESS EVF COLOR EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT LCD BRIGHTNESS LCD COLOR LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT IMAGE DISP. EXIT VIEW MODE SETTING Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD monitor view modes (P 20). EVF BRIGHTNESS Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder. Option AUTO The Setup Menus 9 MANUAL Description The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions. Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7 and +5. EVF COLOR Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder. −5 342 −4 −3 −2 −1 Options 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 SCREEN SETTING EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder. 1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever). EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT SET 2 CANCEL Press MENU/OK. The Setup Menus 9 343 LCD BRIGHTNESS Adjust monitor brightness. −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 Options 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Options 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 LCD COLOR Adjust monitor saturation. −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor. 1 2 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever). Press MENU/OK. The Setup Menus 9 344 SCREEN SETTING IMAGE DISP. Choose how long images are displayed after shooting. Option CONTINUOUS 1.5 SEC 0.5 SEC OFF Description Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again to cancel zoom. Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter button is pressed halfway. Pictures are not displayed after shooting. N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image. • “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities. AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor rotate to match camera orientation. Options ON OFF The Setup Menus 9 345 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview in manual exposure mode. Option Description PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview. Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when you use a flash during daylight. Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this option in situations in which both exposure and white balance OFF are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when you use a flash with an incandescent monitoring lamp. NATURAL LIVE VIEW Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance, and other settings are visible in the monitor. Option The Setup Menus ON OFF 9 346 Description The effects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor, but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hardto-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will differ from those in the final picture. The display will however be adjusted to show the effects of monochrome and sepia settings. The effects of film simulation, white balance, and other settings can be previewed in the monitor. SCREEN SETTING F-Log VIEW ASSIST Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies. Options ON OFF ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual horizon display (P 27). FRAMING GUIDELINE Choose a framing grid for shooting mode. Option G GRID 24 F GRID 9 P P A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the crop shown by the lines at the top and bottom of the display. N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed using D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 25). 347 The Setup Menus Display P For “rule of thirds” composition. H HD FRAMING 9 AUTOROTATE PB Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures during playback. Options ON OFF PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION Choose the zoom ratio selected when the center of the rear command dial is pressed during playback. Option 2x (FROM CENTER) 4x (FROM CENTER) 8x (FROM CENTER) ACTUAL SIZE (FROM FOCUS POINT) PREVIOUS MAG. (FROM CENTER) Description View the center area of the picture at the selected zoom ratio. Regardless of the setting selected, pictures will not be displayed at greater than actual size. View the picture at actual size, centered on the focus area. The zoom ratio varies with the size of the image. Display each picture at the same zoom ratio as the previous picture, starting at the center of the image. Pictures will not, however, be displayed at greater than actual size. The Setup Menus FOCUS SCALE UNITS Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator. Options METERS 9 348 FEET SCREEN SETTING DUAL DISPLAY SETTING Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display. Option Description The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area, R:FOCUS L:FRAME while the left (large) window shows the entire frame. The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left R:FRAME L:FOCUS (large) window shows a close-up of the focus area. EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION Choose the magnification of the full-screen EVF display. Options 1.00x 0.94x 0.89x 0.83x N The screen magnification cannot be changed when D POWER MANAGEMENT > PERFORMANCE is either EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) or EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.). With these settings, the screen magnification is set to 0.77x. The Setup Menus DISP. CUSTOM SETTING Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display (P 25). 9 349 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfinder. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 17). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 385). The Setup Menus 9 350 SCREEN SETTING LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING. OFF ON O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 19). N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON) and off (OFF) (P 385). The Setup Menus 9 351 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Choose the indicators displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING Expo. DISP. Scale L1 L2 L3 L4 R1 R2 Option A Expo. DISP. B d Scale C L1, L2, L3, L4 D R1, R2, R3, R4 Description Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display. Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK. Select ON to display the exposure indicator. Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side of the screen. Choose up to four large icons for display on the right side of the screen. INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. Adjust display contrast. The Setup Menus Option HIGH CONTRAST STANDARD LOW CONTRAST DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING 9 352 Description High contrast. Normal contrast. Low contrast. Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting. SCREEN SETTING LOCATION INFO Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smartphone. Options ON OFF SUB MONITOR SETTING Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor. Separate displays are available for still photography and movie recording. Choose from the following: Option INFORMATION DIALS HISTOGRAM Description Display camera settings. You can choose the settings displayed. Display dials showing ISO sensitivity and shutter speed. Display a histogram. N You can switch between displays by pressing the secondary LCD monitor mode button. 1 Select D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR SETTING in the setup menu. The Setup Menus The INFORMATION Display Follow the steps below to choose the indicators shown in the INFORMATION display. 2 3 Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK. 9 Highlight INFORMATION and press MENU/OK. SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL) INFORMATION DIALS HISTOGRAM 353 4 Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK. SUB MONITOR SETTING INFORMATION(STILL) dScale SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE ISO SHOOTING MODE IMAGE SIZE WHITE BALANCE FILM SIMULATION 5 Highlight the indicator you wish to display and press MENU/OK. Still Photography Mode Choose from: The Setup Menus 9 • SHUTTER SPEED • APERTURE • EXPO. COMP. • ISO • SHOOTING MODE • PHOTOMETRY • DRIVE MODE • FOCUS MODE • WHITE BALANCE • IMAGE SIZE 354 DISPLAY 1 SETTING SHUTTER SPEED APERTURE EXPO. COMP. ISO WHITE BALANCE NONE • IMAGE QUALITY • SHUTTER TYPE • FILM SIMULATION • DYNAMIC RANGE • 35mm FORMAT MODE • BOOST MODE • DUAL IS MODE • SELF-TIMER • COMMUNICATION STATUS • NONE SCREEN SETTING Movie Mode Choose from: • TIME CODE • REMAINING TIME/REC. TIME • REMAINING TIME • REC. TIME • SHUTTER SPEED • APERTURE • EXPO. COMP. • ISO • SHOOTING MODE • PHOTOMETRY 6 • FOCUS MODE • WHITE BALANCE • FILM SIMULATION • DYNAMIC RANGE • IMAGE FORMAT • BOOST MODE • DUAL IS MODE • SELF-TIMER • COMMUNICATION STATUS • NONE Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to change additional indicators. N The d Scale indicator can only be enabled or disabled. The Setup Menus d Scale 9 355 SCREEN SETTING SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read. Option BLACK WHITE Description Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting. Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting. N The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on. x Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is displayed during still photography. Options TRANSPARENT BLACK F Q MENU BACKGROUND Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is displayed during movie recording. The Setup Menus Options TRANSPARENT 9 356 BLACK BUTTON/DIAL SETTING Access options for camera controls. To access control options, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS LEVER SETTING xEDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FEDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING COMMAND DIAL SETTING o S.S. OPERATION COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION SHUTTER AF EXIT FOCUS LEVER SETTING Choose the functions performed by the focus stick (focus lever). Option LOCK (OFF) Description The focus stick cannot be used during shooting. Press the stick to view the focus-point display and tilt the stick PUSH n TO UNLOCK to select a focus point. Tilt the stick to view the focus-point display and select a focus ON point. F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming movies (P 379). 357 The Setup Menus x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography (P 379). 9 FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 385). COMMAND DIAL SETTING Choose the roles played by the command dials. Option FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1 FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 Description Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aperture (APERTURE) * to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aperture (APERTURE) *, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) FRONT COMMAND to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3 DIAL 3. Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aperREAR COMMAND ture (APERTURE) *, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to DIAL the rear command dial. Exposure compensation can be adjusted using either or EXP. COMPENSATION both of the front and rear command dials while the function ASSIGNMENT button assigned to exposure compensation is pressed. The Setup Menus * Aperture ring rotated to A or C in mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual). DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and N • COMMAND holding the center of the front command dial. • You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3. 9 358 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING o S.S. OPERATION Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials. Options ON OFF COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can be adjusted separately. Option Description Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next item. Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item. SHUTTER AF Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Description AF-S • ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway. • OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. • ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed AF-C halfway. • OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. 359 The Setup Menus Option 9 SHUTTER AE If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be adjusted separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual focus). Options ON OFF N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot taken in burst mode. SHOOT WITHOUT LENS Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is attached. Options ON OFF The Setup Menus SHOOT WITHOUT CARD Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory card inserted in the camera. Option ON OFF 9 360 Description When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be displayed. The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING FOCUS RING Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to increase the focus distance. Options X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise) FOCUS RING OPERATION Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the movement of the focus ring. Option NONLINEAR LINEAR Description Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated. Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is rotated, but the focusing speed is unaffected by the speed the ring is rotated. AE/AF-LOCK MODE This option determines the behavior of the button to which exposure and/or focus lock is assigned. The Setup Menus Option Description AE&AF ON WHEN Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed. PRESSING AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until it is pressed again. SWITCH 9 361 AWB-LOCK MODE Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance (AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance. Option Description AWB ON WHEN Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed. PRESSING AWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end the lock. SWITCH EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING Control the behavior of the rear command dial and the button to which exposure compensation is assigned. If d ON WHEN PRESSING is selected, exposure compensation can be adjusted by holding the button while rotating dial; if d ON/OFF SWITCH is selected, exposure compensation can be set by pressing the button once, rotating the dial, and then pressing the button again. The Setup Menus Options d ON WHEN PRESSING 9 362 d ON/OFF SWITCH BUTTON/DIAL SETTING a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback. Option Description Pressing the button marks the current picture for transfer. If the a SMARTPHONE camera is not currently paired with a smartphone, Bluetooth/ TRANSFER ORDER SMARTPHONE SETTING options will be displayed. Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can be d SELECT & selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera SMARTPHONE is paired (P 233). If the camera is not currently paired with TRANSFER ORDER a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options will be displayed instead. Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to an b FTP TRANSFER ORDER FTP server. Pressing the button marks the current picture for priority upload c FTP PRIORITY to an FTP server. The picture will be moved to the head of the TRANSFER ORDER upload queue. HFrame.io Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to TRANSFER ORDER Frame.io. r WIRELESS The button can be used for wireless connections. COMMUNICATION The Setup Menus 9 363 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Enable or disable touch-screen controls. x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Option ON OFF Description The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting. Touch controls disabled. x DOUBLE TAP SETTING Option ON OFF Description Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during shooting. Touch zoom disabled. c TOUCH FUNCTION Option ON OFF Description Enable touch-function gestures. Disable touch-function gestures. The Setup Menus a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING Option ON OFF 9 364 Description The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback. Touch controls disabled. BUTTON/DIAL SETTING EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while the viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can be selected from: Option 6 0 2 4 1 3 5 OFF Description All. Right half. Top right quarter. Bottom right quarter. Left half. Top left quarter. Bottom left quarter. Touch controls disabled. LOCK Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation. Option FUNCTION SELECTION Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is chosen for LOCK SETTING. N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock the controls, press and hold the button again. 365 The Setup Menus Description Choose from the following: • UNLOCK: Reset lock options. ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION LOCK SETTING • SELECTION list. • SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in the FUNCTION SELECTION list. 9 POWER MANAGEMENT Adjust power management settings. To access power management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. POWER MANAGEMENT AUTO POWER OFF PERFORMANCE SHOOTING STAND BY MODE AUTO POWER SAVE AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. EXIT AUTO POWER OFF Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automatically when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off manually. Options 5 MIN The Setup Menus 9 366 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF POWER MANAGEMENT PERFORMANCE Select BOOST to improve focus and EVF display performance. Option BOOST Choose for standard focus and EVF display performance and battery endurance. 367 The Setup Menus NORMAL Description Boost camera focus and EVF display performance. The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected. You can choose to assign priority to: • AF PRIORITY - NORMAL: Focus speed. • AF PRIORITY - LOW LIGHT: Focus speed while adjusting EVF and LCD brightness to make objects in shadows easier to see. Some ghosting may be visible with blurred images. • EVF RESOLUTION PRIORITY: Viewfinder resolution. • EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P): The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing motion. • EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.): The refresh rate for the EVF is increased beyond EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) smoothing motion still further. The EVF may darken. N • Regardless of the option selected, the camera functions in AF PRIORITY - NORMAL mode while the monitor is on. • The D SCREEN SET-UP > EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION setting cannot be changed when either EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) or EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.) is set. With these settings, the screen magnification is set to 0.77x. 9 POWER MANAGEMENT SHOOTING STAND BY MODE Choose the delay before the camera enters shooting standby mode. Option 5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF Description The camera will suspend all functions and enter powering-saving (standby) mode if no operations are performed for the selected period. Shooting standby mode disabled. AUTO POWER SAVE If ON is selected, the display frame rate will drop to save power if no operations are performed for a short period, but the normal frame rate can be restored by operating camera controls. Options ON OFF The Setup Menus AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will first display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, automatically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature at which the camera turns off automatically. Option 9 STANDARD HIGH 368 Description The camera turns off automatically when its temperature reaches the STANDARD value. Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than the STANDARD value, extending the time available to record movies and the like. Because remaining in contact with the camera at these high temperatures could result in low-temperature burns, this option should only be used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera. SAVE DATA SETTING Make changes to file management settings. To access file management settings, press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. SAVE DATA SETTING FRAME NO. EDIT FILE NAME xCARD SLOT SETTING SELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL) SELECT FOLDER COPYRIGHT INFO DEFAULT CAPTION IPTC EXIT FRAME NO. Frame number New pictures are stored in image files named using a four-digit file number assigned by adding one to the last file number used. The File file number is displayed during playback as Directory number number shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file numbering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or the current memory card is formatted. Option RENEW N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be disabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card before resuming shooting. • Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. to CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number. • Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ. 369 The Setup Menus CONTINUOUS Description Numbering continues from the last file number used or the first available file number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to reduce the number of pictures with duplicate file names. Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new memory card is inserted. 9 EDIT FILE NAME Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix (default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”) preceded by an underscore. Option sRGB AdobeRGB Default prefix DSCF _DSF Sample file name ABCD0001 _ABC0001 x CARD SLOT SETTING Choose the role played by the card in the second slot. Option SEQUENTIAL BACKUP SEPARATE Description The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the first slot is full. Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card. RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the first slot and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This option only takes effect when SUPER FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW or NORMAL+RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY. The Setup Menus SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING. Options SLOT 1 9 370 SLOT 2 SAVE DATA SETTING SELECT FOLDER Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent pictures. Option SELECT FOLDER CREATE FOLDER Description To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK. Enter a five-character folder name. The new folder will be created with the next picture you take and subsequent pictures will be stored in that folder. COPYRIGHT INFO Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made. The Setup Menus Option Description DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information. ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name. ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder. Delete the current copyright information. This change applies DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright information recorded with existing images is not affected. 9 371 DEFAULT CAPTION Choose the caption applied to new photos and movies. DISPLAY View the current caption. EDIT Enter a caption. ERASE Delete the current caption. IPTC Choose IPTC metadata applied to new photos. EMBED IPTC If ON is selected, IPTC metadata is embedded in new photos. Options The Setup Menus 9 ON OFF EDIT/CHECK Enter IPTC metadata or check IPTC metadata that is currently registered. RESET Delete metadata that is currently registered. 372 SAVE DATA SETTING GEOTAGGING If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone will be embedded in pictures as they are taken. Options ON OFF The Setup Menus 9 373 MEMO 374 Shortcuts 375 Shortcut Options Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation. Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a custom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-function gesture for direct access: Shortcut Option Description Add frequently-used options to this custom “My menu” menu, which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab. The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button. The Quick Menu Use the Q menu to view or change the options selected for frequently-used menu items. Use the function buttons for direct access to The function buttons selected features. Use touch function button flick gestures (T-Fn1, Touch-function T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to gestures selected features. Shortcuts 10 376 P 377 379 385 390 MY MENU Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options. To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the E (MY MENU) tab. MY MENU SELF-TIMER INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING FILM SIMULATION GRAIN EFFECT PHOTOMETRY SHUTTER TYPE IS MODE gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING EXIT O The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to MY MENU. MY MENU SETTING To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab: 1 In the setup menu, select D USER SETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or F MY MENU SETTING. N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS. MY MENU SETTING ADD ITEMS RANK ITEMS REMOVE ITEMS To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS. 2 xMY MENU SETTING IMAGE SIZE IMAGE QUALITY RAW RECORDING SELECT JPEG/HEIF FILM SIMULATION MONOCHROMATIC COLOR GRAIN EFFECT COLOR CHROME EFFECT OK SELECT CANCEL N Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks. Shortcuts Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and press MENU/OK. Options that can be added to “my menu” are highlighted in blue. 10 377 MY MENU 3 Select a menu to be registered and press the MENU/OK button. Press the MENU/OK button again to return to the menu selection screen. 4 Select a menu to be registered next and press the MENU/OK button. Select the order of the menus to be registered and press the MENU/OK button. SELECT ITEM LOCATION 1 IMAGE SIZE 2 IMAGE QUALITY MOVE 5 SAVE Repeat Step 4 and register “my menu”. To exit “my menu” registration, press the DISP/BACK button. N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items. Shortcuts 10 378 The Quick Menu Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To view the quick menu, press the Q button. The Quick Menu Display The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie modes. At default settings, it contains the following items: Still photography SHOOTING MODE PROGRAM AE SET F IMAGE SIZE G IMAGE QUALITY H FILM SIMULATION Default I HIGHLIGHT TONE J SHADOW TONE K COLOR L SHARPNESS M SELF-TIMER g FACE/EYE DETECTION N SETTING O SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING P FLASH FUNCTION SETTING The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items B–P, which can be changed. 379 Shortcuts A SHOOTING MODE B ISO C DYNAMIC RANGE D WHITE BALANCE E HIGH ISO NR LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM 10 Movie recording SHOOTING MODE PROGRAM AE SET Shortcuts 10 LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM Default A SHOOTING MODE I FILM SIMULATION B SHUTTER SPEED J DYNAMIC RANGE C IMAGE FORMAT K MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE D WHITE BALANCE L F IS MODE APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED g FACE/EYE DETECTION E M CONTROL oL) SETTING F MOVIE ISO N SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ G O BIT RATE ASPECT RATIO WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. H P WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE (WHEN k SELECTED) The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items B–P, which can be changed. 380 The Quick Menu Viewing and Changing Settings 1 Press Q to display the quick menu during shooting. 2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight items and rotate the rear command dial to change. SHOOTING MODE PROGRAM AE SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/ SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button when the quick menu is displayed. 3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete. can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button (P 385). • To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/ DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING. 381 Shortcuts N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls. • Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you 10 Editing the Quick Menu To choose the items displayed in the quick menu: 1 Press and hold the Q button during shooting. N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photography and the movie quick menu when in movie mode. 2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. 3 Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK. The following can be assigned to the quick menu. N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU. Shortcuts 10 382 The Quick Menu Available Items (Still Photography) Choose from: • IMAGE SIZE • IMAGE QUALITY • FILM SIMULATION • GRAIN EFFECT • COLOR CHROME EFFECT • COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • DYNAMIC RANGE • D RANGE PRIORITY • WHITE BALANCE • WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED) • HIGHLIGHT TONE • SHADOW TONE • COLOR • SHARPNESS • CLARITY • HIGH ISO NR • AF MODE • AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING • SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING • MF ASSIST • TOUCH SCREEN MODE • SELF-TIMER • PHOTOMETRY • SHUTTER TYPE • FLICKER REDUCTION • ISO • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING • FLASH COMPENSATION • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT • EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS • EVF/LCD COLOR • NONE N To disable the function button, choose NONE. Shortcuts 10 383 The Quick Menu Available Items (Movies) • FILM SIMULATION • DYNAMIC RANGE • WHITE BALANCE • WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED) • HIGHLIGHT TONE • SHADOW TONE • COLOR • SHARPNESS • HIGH ISO NR • g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING • SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING • MF ASSIST • TOUCH SCREEN MODE • PHOTOMETRY • MOVIE ISO • IMAGE FORMAT • MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT RATIO • MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE • BIT RATE • HIGH SPEED REC • F SELF-TIMER • MOVIE AF MODE • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION • F IS MODE • F IS MODE BOOST • SHUTTER SPEED • APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL) • WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT • EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS • EVF/LCD COLOR • NONE N To disable the function button, choose NONE. Shortcuts 10 384 Function Controls Assign a role to each function button or touch-function gesture for quick access to the selected feature. The Function Buttons Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature. Function Button Defaults The default assignments are: Back-of-Camera Function Buttons Shortcuts Function buttons A AFON button B Center of rear command dial C Q (quick menu) button D AEL (exposure lock) button Default AF-ON FOCUS CHECK QUICK MENU AE LOCK ONLY 10 385 Front-of-Camera Function Buttons Function buttons A Fn1 button B Fn2 button C Fn3 button D Fn4 button E Fn5 button F Fn6 button Shortcuts 10 386 Default FACE DETECTION ON/OFF SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF EXPO. COMP. SUB MONITOR MODE PERFORMANCE ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH Function Controls Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu. • ISO • IS MODE • 35mm FORMAT MODE • WIRELESS COMMUNICATION • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING • TTL-LOCK • MODELING FLASH • HIGH SPEED REC • F SELF-TIMER • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION • WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE • F IS MODE BOOST • ZEBRA SETTING • COOLING FAN SETTING • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT • 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK • MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT • SUB MONITOR MODE • PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD • PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE • NATURAL LIVE VIEW • HISTOGRAM • ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH • LARGE INDICATORS MODE • F-Log VIEW ASSIST • COMMAND DIAL LOCK • AE LOCK ONLY • AF LOCK ONLY • AE/AF LOCK 387 Shortcuts • EXPO. COMP. • IMAGE SIZE • IMAGE QUALITY • RAW • FILM SIMULATION • GRAIN EFFECT • COLOR CHROME EFFECT • COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • DYNAMIC RANGE • D RANGE PRIORITY • WHITE BALANCE • CLARITY • RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING • FOCUS AREA • FOCUS CHECK • AF MODE • AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • FACE DETECTION ON/OFF • RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH • SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF • AF RANGE LIMITER • FOCUS CHECK LOCK • MF ASSIST ON/OFF • SELF-TIMER • AE BKT SETTING • FOCUS BKT SETTING • PHOTOMETRY • SHUTTER TYPE • FLICKER REDUCTION • FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 10 • AF-ON • AWB LOCK ONLY • LOCK SETTING • PERFORMANCE • AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER • Bluetooth ON/OFF • QUICK MENU • PLAYBACK • NONE N To disable the function button, choose NONE. Shortcuts 10 388 Function Controls AF-ON Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus. MODELING FLASH If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mounted flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire the flash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash). TTL-LOCK If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING > TTL-LOCK MODE (P 175). RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been assigned can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to position C1 (CUSTOM 1) on the mode dial. Pressing the button a second time restores the previous settings. Shortcuts 10 389 Touch-Function Gestures Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4) for quick access to selected features. N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func- tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION. Touch-Function Gesture Defaults The default assignments for the different gestures are: Shortcuts Touch-Function Gestures A T-Fn1 (flick up) B T-Fn2 (flick left) C T-Fn3 (flick right) D T-Fn4 (flick down) 10 390 Default HISTOGRAM FILM SIMULATION WHITE BALANCE SHUTTER TYPE Function Controls Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu. • ISO • IS MODE • 35mm FORMAT MODE • WIRELESS COMMUNICATION • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING • TTL-LOCK • MODELING FLASH • HIGH SPEED REC • F SELF-TIMER • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION • WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE • F IS MODE BOOST • ZEBRA SETTING • COOLING FAN SETTING • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT • 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK • MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL • CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT • SUB MONITOR MODE • PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD • PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE • NATURAL LIVE VIEW • HISTOGRAM • ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH • LARGE INDICATORS MODE • F-Log VIEW ASSIST • COMMAND DIAL LOCK • LOCK SETTING Shortcuts • IMAGE SIZE • IMAGE QUALITY • RAW • FILM SIMULATION • GRAIN EFFECT • COLOR CHROME EFFECT • COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • DYNAMIC RANGE • D RANGE PRIORITY • WHITE BALANCE • CLARITY • RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING • FOCUS AREA • FOCUS CHECK • AF MODE • AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • FACE DETECTION ON/OFF • RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH • SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF • AF RANGE LIMITER • FOCUS CHECK LOCK • MF ASSIST ON/OFF • SELF-TIMER • AE BKT SETTING • FOCUS BKT SETTING • PHOTOMETRY • SHUTTER TYPE • FLICKER REDUCTION • FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 10 391 Function Controls • PERFORMANCE • AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER • Bluetooth ON/OFF • QUICK MENU • PLAYBACK • NONE N To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE. Shortcuts 10 392 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 393 Lenses The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM G-mount. Lens Parts Peripherals and Optional Accessories A Lens hood B Mounting marks C Focus ring D Aperture ring lock release E Mounting marks (focal length) F Aperture ring G Lens signal contacts H Front lens cap I Rear lens cap N A GF63mmF2.8 R WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes. 11 394 Lenses Lens Care • Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. • Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use. Removing Lens Caps Remove lens caps as shown. O Lens caps may differ from those shown. Peripherals and Optional Accessories Attaching Lens Hoods When attached, lens hoods reduce glare and protect the front lens element. 11 395 Lenses Aperture Rings In modes A (aperture-priority AE) and M (manual), you can choose the aperture (f-number) by rotating the lens aperture ring. Aperture ring lock release Setting C( ) A( ) Other values ( Aperture ring Description With the aperture ring in the C or A position, you can choose the aperture (f-number) by rotating the camera command dial. ) Set aperture to the selected value. N To select C or A, or to select another value after selecting C or A, press the Peripherals and Optional Accessories aperture ring lock release while rotating the aperture ring. T/S Lenses View the shift amount or rotate amount of lenses on the EVF or LCD (P 25). The shift and rotate amounts are displayed in increments of 0.5 mm and 3°, respectively. N The shift amount and rotate amount are also recorded to the EXIF data of images that have been taken. 11 396 Viewfinder Tilt Adapters The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel the viewfinder left or right ±45° or up or down between 0° and 90°. A Hot shoe B Tilt lock knob C Adapter lock release D Horizontal swivel lock E Connectors F Connector cover G Hot shoe cover Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 397 Attaching the EVF-TL1 Slide the EVF-TL1 onto the camera hot shoe and then attach the EVF-GFX3 electronic viewfinder. N Remove the hot shoe covers from the camera and EVF-TL1 before attaching the adapter and viewfinder. Removing the EVF-TL1 Remove the viewfinder and then, keeping the lock releases (A) pressed, press down on the front of the adapter (B) and slide it from the camera as shown. O Use only one tilt adapter at a time. Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 398 Viewfinder Tilt Adapters Using the EVF-TL1 Swivel the viewfinder into the desired position. Swiveling the Viewfinder Up or Down Loosen the tilt lock knob and swivel the viewfinder up or down from 0° to 90°. With the viewfinder in the desired position (A), tighten the tilt lock knob (B) to lock the viewfinder in place. Peripherals and Optional Accessories Swiveling the Viewfinder Left or Right Release the horizontal swivel lock as shown and swivel the viewfinder left or right ±45°. With the viewfinder in the desired position (A), return the horizontal swivel lock to the latched position (B) to lock the viewfinder in place. 11 399 External Flash Units Use optional external flash units for flash photography. Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, while others can function as commanders controlling remote units via optical wireless flash control. O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for example when a setup menu is displayed on the camera. Red-Eye Removal Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected for F FLASH SETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL and G AF/MF SETTING > FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is FACE DETECTION ON. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye” caused when light from the flash is reflected from the subject’s retinas. Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 400 External Flash Units Flash Settings 1 Connect the unit to the camera. 2 In shooting mode, select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH SETTING) menu tab. The options available vary with the flash unit. FLASH SETTING FLASH FUNCTION SETTING RED EYE REMOVAL TTL-LOCK MODE LED LIGHT SETTING COMMANDER SETTING CH SETTING EXIT Menu SYNC TERMINAL SHOE MOUNT FLASH COMMANDER (OPTICAL) Description Displayed when no compatible flash unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe. Displayed when an optional flash unit is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on. Displayed if an optional flash unit functioning as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control is connected and turned on. P 402 403 406 unit or no flash unit is connected. 3 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate the rear command dial to change the highlighted setting. 4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect. MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH ADJUST END Peripherals and Optional Accessories N SYNC TERMINAL will be also displayed if an incompatible flash 11 401 SYNC TERMINAL The following options are available when no compatible flash unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe. MODE SYNC TERMINAL ADJUST Setting END Peripherals and Optional Accessories Description Choose from the following options: • M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than A Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the unit uses long flashes or has a slow response time. • D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled. Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before B Sync it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in most circumstances. The Sync Terminal Use the sync terminal to connect flash units that require a sync cable. 11 402 External Flash Units SHOE MOUNT FLASH The following options are available when an optional shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on. MODE SHOE MOUNT FLASH ADJUST END Setting Peripherals and Optional Accessories Description The flash control mode selected with the flash unit. This can in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options available vary with the flash. • TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B). • M: The flash fires at the selected output regardless of subject A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be adjusted from the camera (B). • MULTI: Repeating flash. Compatible shoe-mounted flash units will fire multiple times with each shot. • D (OFF): The flash does not fire. Some flash units can be turned off from the camera. 11 403 Setting Peripherals and Optional Accessories Description The options available vary with flash control mode. • TTL: Adjust flash compensation (the full value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the flash unit. B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust flash output (compatible units only). output Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power, from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits of the flash control system; take a test shot and check the results. Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. • E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken. F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible; • C Flash mode (TTL) flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released. • G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released. 11 404 External Flash Units Setting D Sync E Zoom F Lighting G Number of flashes * H Frequency * * Full value may not be applied if limits of flash control system are exceeded. Peripherals and Optional Accessories G LED light Description Control flash timing. • H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice). • I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes. • R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for flash control mode. Note: Horizontal bands may appear in pictures taken using AUTO FP(HSS) at some shutter speeds. The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. If the unit supports this feature, choose from: • J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage. • K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. • L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT), as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT). Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography. Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode. 11 405 COMMANDER(OPTICAL) The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. MODE COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ADJUST END Peripherals and Optional Accessories Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice of four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical signals between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. The flash units can also be placed in up to three groups (A, B, and C) and flash mode C and flash level adjusted separately for A each group. B 11 406 External Flash Units Setting A Flash control mode (group A) B Flash control mode (group B) C Flash control mode (group C) D Flash compensation/ output (group A) output (group B) F Flash compensation/ output (group C) Peripherals and Optional Accessories E Flash compensation/ Description Choose flash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL% is available for groups A and B only. • TTL: The units in the group fire in TTL mode. Flash compensation can be adjusted separately for each group. • TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can specify the output of the selected group as a percentage of the other and adjust overall flash compensation for both groups. • M: In mode M, the units in the group fire at the selected output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless of subject brightness or camera settings. • MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units in all groups to repeating flash mode. All units will fire multiple times with each shot. • D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will not fire. Adjust flash level for the selected group according to option selected for flash control mode. Note that the full value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceeded. • TTL: Adjust flash compensation. • M/MULTI: Adjust flash output. • TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and adjust overall flash compensation. 11 407 Setting G Flash mode (TTL) Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 H Sync I Zoom J Lighting 408 Description Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected. • E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken. • F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released. • G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is released. Control flash timing. • H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice). • I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes. • R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only). The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected for flash control mode. The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length. If the unit supports this feature, choose from: • J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage. • K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle. • L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for more even lighting. External Flash Units Setting K Commander K Number of flashes L Channel L Frequency Description Choose the group for units functioning as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control in TTL, TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clipon flash units that support Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. • Gr A: Assign the commander to group A. • Gr B: Assign the commander to group B. • Gr C: Assign the commander to group C. • OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that does not affect the final picture. Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the shutter is released in MULTI mode. Choose the channel used by the commander for communication with the remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity. Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode. Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 409 Vertical Battery Grips The VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip can be used to supplement the camera battery or when holding the camera rotated to take pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation. Peripherals and Optional Accessories A Fn1 button B Fn2 button C Fn3 button D Shutter button E Control lock F Front command dial G Fn5 button H Fn6 button I Lock screw knob J Tripod socket K Eyelet for camera strap L Connector cover M Lock screw N Serial number plate O Hanging hook P Compartment for connector cover supplied with camera Q AFON button R Rear command dial S Focus stick (focus lever) T Q (quick menu) button U AEL (exposure lock) button V Indicator lamps W Battery tray X Battery-chamber cover latch Y Connector N All controls perform the same function as the matching controls on the camera. 11 410 Vertical Battery Grips Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip N Check that the camera is off before attaching or removing the vertical battery grip. 1 Remove the connector cover. Remove the vertical battery grip connector cover from the camera (A) and the connector cover from the vertical battery grip (B). (A) (B) N The vertical battery grip connector cover of the camera (A) can be placed in the compartment for the connector cover. Store the connector cover of the vertical battery grip (B) so that is not lost after removal. Attach the vertical battery grip to the camera. While hooking the hanging hook in the hole to hook vertical battery grip on the camera (A), attach the vertical battery grip to the camera (B). Hanging hook Peripherals and Optional Accessories 2 11 Hole to hook Vertical Battery Grip 411 3 Rotate the lock screw knob to secure the vertical battery grip. O • Fully tighten the lock screw knob after attaching the grip. • Do not touch the contacts. • After removing the grip, replace the vertical battery grip connector cover (A) and connector cover (B). • The grip is not waterproof, and caution is required to prevent the en- try of dirt, dust, water, noxious gases, salt, and other foreign matter. Do not place the grip on wet surfaces. Before use, be sure that the battery tray and battery-chamber cover are fully closed. Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 412 Vertical Battery Grips Inserting and Removing Batteries Insert the batteries as shown. The batteries can be removed as shown. Peripherals and Optional Accessories N • Be sure the camera is off before exchanging batteries. • Use only NP-W235 batteries. 11 413 Battery Level When a vertical battery grip is connected, the camera battery level display shows the camera battery level and the level of the batteries inserted in the VG-GFX100II. • The display shows the level of inserted batteries only. • When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera and the VG-GFX100II, the batteries will be used in the following order: A The left grip battery (L) B The right grip battery (R) C The camera battery Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 414 Vertical Battery Grips Charging the Batteries The batteries in the vertical battery grip will charge when the grip is attached to a camera that is connected to an AC-5VJ AC adapter via a USB cable. The indicator lamps will light green while the battery charges; the lamp on the left shows the status of the left battery, the lamp on the right the status of the right battery. Indicator lamp On Off Blinks Battery status Battery charging Charging complete Battery fault reduces charging times to as little as 180 minutes. • The batteries will not charge while the camera is on. • For more information, see “Charging the Battery” (P 50) and “The Battery and Power Supply” (P 430). Peripherals and Optional Accessories O • All three batteries charge simultaneously; charging takes about 330 minutes. • Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 45 W or above 11 415 Cooling Fans Cooling fans help keep the camera cool, allowing longer periods of non-stop movie recording. Attaching a Cooling Fan Open the monitor and attach an FAN-001 cooling fan. O Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the fan. Peripherals and Optional Accessories 1 Open the monitor. 2 Remove the camera cooling fan connector cover and the fan connector cap. After removing the cooling fan connector cover (A), attach it to the fan for safe-keeping. Keep the fan connector cap (B) in a safe place. (A) 11 (B) (A) 416 Cooling Fans 3 Place the fan on the camera, making sure the screws and connectors are correctly aligned. 4 Tighten the screws. Peripherals and Optional Accessories N The cooling fan may fall off if the screws are not sufficiently tightened. 11 417 Cooling Fans Using the Fan Fan speed can be adjusted using the A SHOOTING SETTING > xF COOLING FAN SETTING and B MOVIE SETTING > xF COOLING FAN SETTING options in the photo and movie menus, respectively. Select OFF to turn the fan off. O • At some speeds, the noise of the fan may be audible in movies recorded with the camera. • Depending on the LCD orientation, the EVF turns off, and the LCD only turns on. Peripherals and Optional Accessories 11 418 Technical Notes 419 Accessories from Fujifilm The following accessories are available from Fujifilm. For the latest information on the accessories available in your region, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/. Rechargeable Li-ion batteries NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required. Dual battery chargers BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At +25 °C/+77 °F, the batteries will charge in about 200 minutes. Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 30 W or above reduces charging times to as little as 150 minutes. FUJINON lenses GF-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM G-mount. Vertical battery grips VG-GFX100II: See “Vertical battery grips” (P 410). Tilt adapters EVF-TL1: This adapter lets you swivel the viewfinder left or right ±45° or up or down between 0° and 90° to take shots from different angles. Eye cups EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewfinder eyecups to prevent light leaking into the viewfinder window. Mount adapters Technical Notes 12 H MOUNT ADAPTER G: This mount adapter allows the camera to be used with SUPER EBC FUJINON accessories for the GX645AF, giving you the use of one additional teleconverter and nine different lenses. Macro extension tubes MCEX-18G WR/MCEX-45G WR: Mount this adapter between the lens and the camera body for macro photography with large reproduction ratios. View camera adapters VIEW CAMERA ADAPTER G: This adapter is for use with lenses for older FUJINON large-format cameras, including lenses in the CM FUJINON series. 420 Accessories from Fujifilm Shoe-mounted flash units EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. Featuring support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifilm optical wireless flash control, it can be used as a commander or remote flash unit for remote wireless flash photography. EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 flash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries. EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. It can also be used as remote flash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless commander. EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developed by Nissin Japan, this wireless flash commander can be used with optional EF-60 clip-on flash units and other NAS-compliant units. * NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd. EF-42: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports manual and TTL flash control. EF-X20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports manual and TTL flash control. EF-20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports TTL flash control (manual flash control is not supported). Cooling fans FAN-001: See “Cooling Fans” (P 416). Remote releases RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure. The RR-100 has a connector with a diameter of 2.5 mm; a third-party ⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter is required for connection to the camera. Technical Notes Stereo microphones MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording. 12 421 Accessories from Fujifilm Grip belts GB-001: Improves grip. Body caps BCP-002: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached. instax SHARE printers SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax film. Technical Notes 12 422 Software and Services for Use with Your Camera The camera can be used with the following software and services. For the latest information on software available from Fujifilm, visit https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/. Smartphone Apps Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a smartphone or tablet. https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/ RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conversion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of charge from the Fujifilm website. https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converterex-powered-by-silkypix/ N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. • For information on when support will be available, visit: https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-expowered-by-silkypix/ Technical Notes 12 423 Capture One Express for Fujifilm View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. Capture One Express for Fujifilm is available free of charge from Capture One A/S. https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available. Capture One for Fujifilm Capture One for Fujifilm workflow software from Capture One A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other formats. https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available. FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic. • FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroomtether-plugin/ Technical Notes FUJIFILM X Acquire This computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specified folder as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/ 12 424 Software and Services for Use with Your Camera FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images in other formats. https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/ FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner Computer software for combining pictures taken using pixel-shift multi-shot or reducing false colors (P 121). https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/ Frame.io Camera to Cloud Send still images and movies directly from the camera to the Frame.io platform via a network. https://frame.io/ Technical Notes 12 425 For Your Safety IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions • Read Instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. Instructions: The safety and operating instructions • Retain Instructions should be retained for future reference. Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the • Heed Warnings operating instructions should be adhered to. Instructions: All operating and use instructions • Follow Instructions should be followed. Technical Notes 12 Installation Power Sources: This video product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For video products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This video product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. This video product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near water—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like. 426 Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Antennas Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the video product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE Ground Clamp Electric Servicee Equipmentt Antenna Lead in Wire AAnntenna Discharge Unit D (NEC N SECTION 8 810-20) Ground Clamps Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC ART 250. PART H) Grounding Conductors (NEC SECTION 810-21) For Your Safety Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personlight or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions: lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. video product. • If the video product has been exposed to rain or water. Use If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- • been damaged. fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. If the video product does not operate normally follow the Use a damp cloth for cleaning. operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustthis video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation. video product. When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perforLightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service. ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall sure the service technician has used replacement parts specoutlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will ified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in power-line surges. fire, electric shock or other hazards. Service Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in propdangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition. qualified service personnel. Be sure to read these notes before use Safety Notes • Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these The symbols on the product (including the accesories) represent the following: safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use. AC • After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. DC About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.) WARNING This icon indicates that death or serious inWARNING jury can result if the information is ignored. The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (“Required”). Unplug from power socket Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the camera or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids. Should liquid find its way into the camera or connecting cables, turn the camera off, remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer. 427 Technical Notes This icon indicates that personal injury or CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored. If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC power adapter. Continued use of the camera when it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor, or is in any other abnormal state can cause a fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer. 12 WARNING Do not use in the bathroom or shower Do not disassemble Do not touch internal parts Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This can cause a fire or electric shock. Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire or electric shock. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connection cord and do not place heavy objects on the connection cord. These actions could damage the cord and cause a fire or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, contact your Fujifilm dealer. Do not use cables with bent connectors. Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause injury. Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do not use shooting, playback, or any other operations of the camera while operating a car or other vehicle. This can result in you falling down or being involved in a traffic accident. If you take pictures while walking, pay attention to your surroundings. Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due to induced current from the lightning discharge. Do not use the battery except as specified. Load the battery as shown by the indicator. Technical Notes Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking, causing fire, burns, or other injury. Use only batteries or AC power adapters specified for use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the power supply voltage shown. The use of other power sources can cause a fire. 12 428 WARNING If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with clean water and seek medical attention or call an emergency number right away. Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than those specified here. The supplied charger is for use only with batteries of the type supplied with the camera. Using the charger to charge conventional batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst. Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause visual impairment. Take particular care when photographing infants and young children. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces. Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the product for prolonged periods while the product is on. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns, particularly during prolonged use, at high ambient temperatures, when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP., or with users who suffer from poor circulation or reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or similar precautions are recommended. Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explosive gases, or dust. When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery, keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with other metallic objects or batteries could cause the battery to ignite or burst. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts out of the reach of small children. Children may swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical attention or call emergency. Keep out of reach of small children. Among the elements that could cause injury are the strap, which could become entangled about a child’s neck, causing strangulation, and the flash, which could cause visual impairment. Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel. This product generates radio-frequency emissions that could interfere with navigational or medical equipment. For Your Safety CAUTION Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fire or electric shock. Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in locations such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight. This can cause a fire. Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause injury. Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage the power cord or cables and cause a fire or electric shock. Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build up and distort the casing or cause a fire. Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock. When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to use the camera for an extended period, remove the battery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter. Failure to do so can cause a fire or electric shock. When charging ends, unplug the charger from the power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the power socket can cause a fire. When a memory card is removed, the card could come out of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it and gently release the card. Injury could result to those struck by the ejected card. Do not handle the memory card immediately after shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing it from the camera. Technical Notes Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause a fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer to request internal cleaning every two years. Please note that this service is not free of charge. Dispose of the product in accord with location regulations. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. 12 429 The Battery and Power Supply Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read L Cautions: Handling the Battery the appropriate sections. • Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neckWARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat laces or hairpins. • Do not expose to flame or heat. such as sunshine, fire or the like. Do not disassemble or modify. The following describes the proper use of batteries and how • Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures. to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or • • Use with designated chargers only. cause leakage, overheating, fire, or explosion. • Dispose of used batteries promptly. Li-ion Batteries • Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks. Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water. battery. • Keep the terminals clean. The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal. before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. L Caution: Disposal L Notes on the Battery The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of Charge the battery one or two days before use. battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate. Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when Do not mechanically crush or split batteries. not in use. Technical Notes 12 Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted AC Power Adapters battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged • The AC power adapter is for indoor use only. spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, • Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera. or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the adapter. Disinsert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable. battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating • Do not disassemble. devices. • Do not expose to high heat and humidity. • Do not subject to strong physical shocks. L Charging the Battery The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied • The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. use. This is normal. Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below • If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate +10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to the receiving antenna. charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge. Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery does not however need to be fully discharged before charging. The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after charging or use. This is normal. L Battery Life A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced. If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may find that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge the battery regularly. Storage If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store it at room temperature with the battery charged to approximately one half to ⁄ capacity. If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature. L 430 For Your Safety Using the Camera Trademark Information including artificial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or precaution could damage the camera image sensor. registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces • Strong sunlight focused through the viewfinder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiage the panel of electronic viewfinder (EVF). Do not aim wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS, the electronic viewfinder at the sun. Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a Take Test Shots registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Camera to test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is Cloud, Frame.io, Lightroom and Photoshop are either regisfunctioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept tered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States liability for damages or lost profits incurred as a result of and/or other countries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and product malfunction. Wi-Fi Protected Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Notes on Copyright Alliance®. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways such marks by Fujifilm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of the CFA (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPOto note that the transfer of memory cards containing images RATED. USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible of USB Implementers Forum. AirGlu™ is a trademark or regiswithin the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws. tered trademark of Atomos. All other trade names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Handling their respective owners. To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are Electrical Interference being recorded. This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equipment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the Liquid Crystal camera in a hospital or on an aircraft. In the event that the display is damaged, care should be taken to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action Color Television Systems NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color teleindicated should any of the following situations arise: • If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the vision telecasting specification adopted mainly in the U.S.A., area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color television system adopted mainly in European countries and running water. • If liquid crystal enters your eyes, flush the affected eye with China. clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32) assistance. Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera file format in which • If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly information stored with photographs is used for optimal colwith water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vomor reproduction during printing. iting, then seek medical assistance. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software Although the display is manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed softalways lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and ware without the permission of the applicable governing images recorded with the product are unaffected. bodies is prohibited. • Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, Technical Notes Lenses and Other Accessories • Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod. • Fujifilm will not be held liable for performance issues or damage caused by the use of third-party accessories. 12 431 NOTICES To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera. Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See: http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate For Customers in the U. S. A. Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Technical Notes Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25 Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25 FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 12 432 Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the government’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this product must be used with a Fujifilm-specified ferrite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord. A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Efficiency Regulations, Sections 1601 through 1609 For Your Safety For Customers in Canada CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B) CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. GFX100 II has been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences to the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. This symbol on the batteries or accumulators indicates that those batteries shall not be treated as household waste. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accumulators please dispose these separately according to your local requirements. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local authorities and ask for the correct way of disposal. In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates that they are to be disposed of separately. Caring for the Camera To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Technical Notes Storage and Use If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera in locations that are: • exposed to rain, steam, or smoke • very humid or extremely dusty • exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day • extremely cold • subject to strong vibration • exposed to strong magnetic fields, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer, or magnet • in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides • next to rubber or vinyl products 12 433 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions This product complies with the following EU Directives: • RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU • RE Directive 2014/53/EU Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF230001 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs.pdf The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs_uk.pdf This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product: Technical Notes 12 This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®). • Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP): WLAN 2.4 GHz: 11.81 dBm WLAN 5 GHz: 13.51 dBm Bluetooth: 3.20 dBm IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter. Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. device. Fujifilm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized • Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device. use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater degree of reliability than offered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to ensure safety and prevent malfunction. • Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device. Fujifilm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions. • Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference that may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of other wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band. • The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation. • Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks. - Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access rights. - Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties. - Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services. The • following may be punishable by law: - Disassembly or modification or this device - Removal of device certification labels • This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications. • To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confirm that the RFID transmitter is not in operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the affected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifilm representative. 434 For Your Safety • Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod- uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in the network/USB setting menu before boarding. • Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/ UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.119 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue. U.K. Importer: FUJIFILM UK Limited Fujifilm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom EU Importer: FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany Technical Notes 12 435 For Your Safety Be sure to read these notes before using the lens Safety Notes WARNING • Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use. • After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. About the Icons The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is used incorrectly as a result. This icon indicates that death or serious WARNING injury can result if the information is ignored. This icon indicates that personal injury or CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored. The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the instructions which are to be observed. Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”). Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”). Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an action that must be performed (“Required”). Do not immerse Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to observe this precaution can cause a fire or electric shock. Do not disassemble Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire, electric shock, or injury due to product malfunction. Do not touch internal parts Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid injury or electric shock, and take the product to the point of purchase for consultation. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may fall, causing injury. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera viewfinders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause permanent visual impairment. CAUTION Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty. Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire or electric shock. Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire. Keep out of the reach of small children. This product could cause injury in the hands of a child. Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution can cause electric shock. Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fire or burns. Technical Notes When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the lens can cause fire or burns. Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other objects, causing injury. 12 436 Product Care To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions. Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals, which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body. Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor, taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in place. Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the image sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR CLEANING. Technical Notes 12 437 Cleaning the Image Sensor Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING > SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as described below. O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if it is damaged during cleaning. 1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove dust from the sensor. N Do not use a brush or blower brush. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the sensor. 2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary. 3 Replace the body cap or lens. Technical Notes 12 438 Firmware Updates Updates to product firmware may result in changes not described in the manual. For more information, visit: https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/ Checking the Firmware Version O The camera will only display the firmware version if a memory card is inserted. 1 2 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted. 3 Turn the camera off. Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The current firmware version will be displayed; check the firmware version. N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional accessories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, and mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera. Technical Notes 12 439 Troubleshooting Consult the table below should you encounter problems using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, contact your local Fujifilm distributor. Power and Battery Problem Solution • The battery was not charged before first use: The battery is not Technical Notes charged at shipment. Charge the battery before first use (P 50). The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful• The camera does not ly-charged spare battery (P 50). turn on. • The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct orientation (P 43). • The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the battery-chamber cover (P 43). The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off The monitor does not and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button turn on. pressed halfway until the monitor activates. • The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pocket or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera immediately before taking a picture. • There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals The battery runs down with a soft, dry cloth. quickly. • ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF: Turn PRE-AF off (P 152). • The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace it with a new battery (P 336). 12 440 Troubleshooting Problem The camera turns off suddenly. The camera does not turn off. Solution The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 50). The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp (P 10). • Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly plugged in (P 50). • Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the AC power adapter (P 50). Charging does not start. • The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If the battery has not been charged for an extended period, charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it with a new battery. • Insert the camera battery (P 43). • Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation (P 43). Charging does not start • Confirm that the camera is connected to the computer (P 53). (USB). • If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable (P 53). • Insert the battery. Charging does not start • Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation. (battery charger). • The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check that adapter is correctly connected to the charger. Charging is slow. Charge the battery at room temperature. Technical Notes 12 441 Problem Solution • There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals The indicator lamp blinks, but the battery does not charge. with a soft, dry cloth (P 43). • The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace it with a new battery (P 336). If the battery still fails to charge, contact your Fujifilm dealer (P 420). The power supply icon is Confirm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is senot displayed. lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Menus and Displays Problem Solution Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa Display is not in English. (P 58, 335). Technical Notes 12 442 Troubleshooting Shooting Problem Solution • The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete pictures (P 45, 224). • The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card in the camera (P 332). • There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed. with a soft, dry cloth. • The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card (P 45). • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 50). • The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on (P 54). • You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 360). Mottling (“noise”) appears in the monitor or viewfinder when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the displays. Images taken with the camera are unaffected. • The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manThe camera does not focus. ual focus (P 110). • The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 99). Technical Notes 12 443 Problem Solution • The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 153). • The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame: Change the composition so that the subject’s face occupies a larger area of the frame (P 153). No face is detected. • The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the subject to face the camera (P 153). • g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is off: Turn g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING on (P 153). • The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level. • The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light. • The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point where you can see as much of the subject as possible (P 155). • The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get No subject is detected. closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame (P 155). • OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 155). • The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light. • The flash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 174). • The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE that does not use the electronic shutter (P 170). The flash does not fire. • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 50). • The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single frame mode (P 8). Technical Notes 12 444 Troubleshooting Problem Solution • The subject is not in range of the flash: Position the subject in The flash does not fully light the subject. range of the flash. • The flash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly. • Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower shutter speed (P 78, 82, 464). • The lens is dirty: Clean the lens. • The lens is blocked: Keep objects Pictures are blurred. Pictures are mottled. away from the lens (P 61). • s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is displayed in red: Check focus before shooting (P 62). • Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is* high: This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel mapping (P 142). * X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various colors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce the occurrence of such bright spots. • The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures: Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 54, 456). • A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 54, 456). Technical Notes 12 445 Playback Problem Pictures are grainy. Playback zoom is unavailable. No sound in movie playback. Solution The pictures were taken with a different make or model of camera. The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a different make or model of camera. • Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume (P 341). • The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during recording. • The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during playback. Selected pictures are not deleted. Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected. Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 228). selected. The battery-chamber cover was opened while the camFile numbering is era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the batunexpectedly reset. tery-chamber cover (P 369). Technical Notes 12 446 Troubleshooting Wired Connections Problem The monitor is blank. Both the TV and camera monitor are blank. No picture or sound on TV. The computer does not recognize the camera. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO or FUJIFILM X Acquire fails to correctly detect the camera. Cannot connect to iPhones or iPads. Cannot connect to smartphone. Solution The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 64). The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the viewfinder. Use the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode (P 20). • The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera properly (P 64). • Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI” (P 64). • The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the television to adjust the volume (P 64). Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected (P 255). Check camera settings. If the camera is connected via USB, be sure 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE is chosen for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING. (P 291, 292). POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply power (P 254). Confirm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure for connecting the camera varies with the type of connector with which the smartphone is equipped (P 252). Technical Notes 12 447 Wireless Transfer For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connections, visit: https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/ Problem Cannot connect to smartphone. The camera is slow to connect or upload pictures to the smartphone. Upload fails or is interrupted. Solution • The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer (P 247). • Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam- era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cordless phones (P 247). • The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart- Technical Notes phone and camera can connect to only one device at a time. End the connection and try again (P 247). • There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make Cannot upload images. connection difficult (P 247). • The image was created on another device: The camera may not be able to upload images created on other devices. • The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in formats they do not support. Select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE. Selecting OFF Smartphone will not increases upload times for larger images; in addition, display pictures. some phones may not display images over a certain size (P 322). 12 448 Troubleshooting Remote Movie Recording Problem Solution • The IP address is incorrect: Enter the correct IP address. Note that the IP address may change unexpectedly if automatic IP address assignment is enabled (P 293). • The access point for the computer or tablet is not configured correctly: Be sure the access point for the computer or The remote recording tablet is configured correctly (P 293). display does not appear The camera is not on the same network as the computer or tab• in the browser. let: Be sure the camera is connected to the same local-area network (LAN) as the computer or tablet (P 293). • The camera clock is not set to the correct date: Set the camera clock to the correct date (day, month, and year). • Delete the browser history and/or cache. • The connection is not high speed: Be sure both the camera and the computer or tablet are connected to the network The browser is slow via Ethernet or high-speed (e.g., 5 GHz) wireless. to update the view The browser is configured to prioritize image quality over per• through the camera formance: Select real-time performance for “Display with lens. Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority” in the browser remote recording menu (P 309). Technical Notes 12 449 Problem Solution The browser does not display the same menus Automatic translation is enabled in the browser: Disable autoor other text as the matic translation. camera. • The camera root certificate has not been installed on the computer or tablet: Install the camera root certificate on the The computer or tablet computer or tablet (P 298). cannot connect to the The camera IP address has changed: The camera root certifi• camera via HTTPS. cate must be reinstalled on the computer or tablet each time the camera’s IP address changes. The computer or Root certificates for some cameras have not been installed on tablet cannot connect the computer or tablet: Install root certificates for all cameras to multiple cameras via (P 298). HTTPS. • SERVER TYPE has not been set to HTTPS: Set SERVER TYPE to HTTPS and import a root certificate. A second or subsequent Camera 1 is not selected in the “Choose camera” area: Select • camera cannot be Camera 1 in the “Choose camera” area, and then connect connected from a QR and use the second or subsequent camera. code. • The browser is not allowed to access the tablet’s camera: Allow the tablet’s browser to access the camera. Technical Notes 12 450 Troubleshooting Miscellaneous Problem Solution • Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the battery (P 43). The camera is unresponsive. • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 50). • The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connection. • The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button The camera does not function as expected. No sound. Pressing the Q button does not display the quick menu. to unlock the controls (P 17, 19). Remove and reinsert the battery (P 43). If the problem persists, contact your Fujifilm dealer. Adjust the volume (P 338). TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 175). Technical Notes 12 451 Warning Messages and Displays The following warnings appear in the display. Warning Description Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged i (red) spare battery. Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a fulj (blinks red) ly-charged spare battery. The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on ans (displayed in red with other subject at the same distance, then recompose the red focus frame) picture. The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be Aperture or shutter over- or under-exposed. Use the flash for additional lightspeed displayed in red ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject. FOCUS ERROR Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off, remove the lens, LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer. • The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT. CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. • Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer. Technical Notes 12 452 Warning Messages and Displays Warning LENS ERROR CARD ERROR PROTECTED CARD BUSY b MEMORY FULL Description Turn the camera off, remove the lens, and check for foreign matter between the lens and the camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer. • The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: Format the card. • The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. • Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card. • Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer. The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera to format the card. The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded. Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. Technical Notes 12 453 Warning Description • Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or WRITE ERROR FRAME NO. FULL Technical Notes 12 454 turn the camera off and then on again. If the message persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer. • Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures: Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free space. • The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card. • The memory card was removed while data were being recorded: Do not remove the memory card during recording. • The memory card write speed is slow: When recording movies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough. The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO.. Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO.. Warning Messages and Displays Warning Description • The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The file cannot be viewed. READ ERROR • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con- tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card. • Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer. An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected PROTECTED FRAME picture. Remove protection and try again. CAN NOT CROP The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera. Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy DPOF FILE ERROR any additional pictures you wish to print to another memory card and create a second print order. CAN NOT SET DPOF The picture cannot be printed using DPOF. F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF. CAN NOT ROTATE The selected picture cannot be rotated. F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated. Technical Notes 12 455 Warning Messages and Displays Warning Description F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the m CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a different model of camera. The camera is approaching the maximum temperature alp (yellow) CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the STANDARD camera off and wait for it to cool. TEMPERATURE LIMIT The camera is approaching the maximum temperature allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF p (yellow) TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining CAMERA IS APPROACHING in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature HIGH TEMPERburns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will HOLD CAMERA FOR shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait LONG PERIODS OF TIME for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when this warning is displayed. The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and p (red) the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the camHIGH TEMPERATURE era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in picLIMIT REACHED tures taken when this warning is displayed. SHUTTING DOWN Technical Notes 12 456 Errors If a C or B icon appears in the display, select INFORMATION > ERROR DESCRIPTION in the network/USB setting menu to view the error and then take the appropriate action. Error Solution NOT CONNECTED TO The wired LAN (Ethernet) cable is not connected: Connect the NETWORK VIA ETHERNET wired LAN (Ethernet) cable. CABLE • No connection to access point: Confirm that the access point is on, verify its settings and IP address, and check that there are no obstructions blocking its signal. If necessary, NOT CONNECTED TO move the camera closer to the access point. NETWORK VIA WIRELESS Camera settings have not been correctly adjusted for connec• LAN tion to the access point: Check that the password, encryption type, and SSID match those chosen for the access point. IP ADDRESS CANNOT BE ASSIGNED BY DHCP • No DHCP server: If there is no DHCP server on the network, SERVER OR THERE IS AN enter the IP address and other information manually. ISSUE WITH IP ADDRESS • The DHCP server is down: Contact the network administraSETTING PLEASE CHECK tor. SETTINGS Technical Notes 12 457 Error CANNOT REACH FTP SERVER OR COMMUNICATE WITH FTP SERVER PLEASE CHECK SETTINGS LOGIN TO FTP SERVER HAS FAILED CANNOT TRANSFER OR SAVE FILES TO FTP SERVER CA ROOT CERTIFICATE IS INVALID Technical Notes 12 458 Solution Duplicate IP address: Change the camera IP address to en• sure that it does not duplicate the address of any other device on the network. • Invalid IP address: If the network includes a DHCP server, select auto address allocation. If IP addresses are assigned manually, check that the IP address is correct. • The DNS server address is incorrect: If you configured the DNS address manually, be sure the information you entered is correct. • FTP server settings are incorrect: Check that the server type, server address, port number, and proxy settings are correct. • The FTP server is down: Contact the network administrator. Incorrect user name or password: Check that you have supplied the correct user name and password. • FTP server permissions are configured incorrectly: Check that you have write access to the FTP server. • The FTP server is full: Check the amount of free storage space remaining on the FTP server. The root certificate has expired: After confirming that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date, load an updated CA root certificate. Errors Error Solution The Frame.io server may be down: Check that the Frame.io • server is up or try again later. • The camera clock is not set to the correct time and date: Set the camera clock. Frame.io DISCONNECTED • The network is not configured correctly: Check the settings of the connected network. • Turn the camera off and then on again. • Contact the network administrator. UNEXPECTED ERROR HAS • Turn the camera off and then on again. OCCURRED • Contact the network administrator. Technical Notes 12 459 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the recording time or number of pictures available at different image sizes. All figures are approximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, producing wide variations in the number of files that can be stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may not diminish at an even rate. SD/CFexpress memory cards 64 GB Capacity T O 4∶3 RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) Photos RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) RAW (COMPRESSED) Movies * V2160 W1080 SUPER FINE FINE NORMAL 1040 1560 300 590 880 79 minutes 79 minutes 2490 * Assumes default bit rate. O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the settings selected (P 72). • Depending on the bit rate, shots saved to memory cards with a capacity of 32 GB or less may be recorded across multiple files without interruption. The same is true of shots over an hour in length, independent of the bit rate and memory card capacity. Technical Notes 12 460 Specifications System Model Product Number Effective pixels Image sensor Storage media Memory card slots File system FUJIFILM GFX100 II FF230001 Approx. 102 million 43.8 mm × 32.9 mm Bayer array with primary color filter Fujifilm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC and CFexpress Type B memory cards • SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant) ×1 • CFexpress memory card slot (Type B) ×1 • Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0 • Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compliant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit) • Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB) • Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, H.264, and ProRes • Audio (including voice memos): - LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling) - AAC (MP4 recordings only) • Audio (via XLR microphone adapter): - LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling) - AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling) Technical Notes 12 461 System Image size O 4∶3 (11648 × 8736) O 65∶24 (11648 × 4304) O 3∶2 (11648 × 7768) O 5∶4 (10928 × 8736) O 16∶9 (11648 × 6552) O 7∶6 (10192 × 8736) O 1∶1 (8736 × 8736) P 4∶3 (8256 × 6192) P 65∶24 (8256 × 3048) P 3∶2 (8256 × 5504) P 5∶4 (7744 × 6192) P 16∶9 (8256 × 4640) P 7∶6 (7232 × 6192) P 1∶1 (6192 × 6192) Q 4∶3 (4000 × 3000) Q 65∶24 (4000 × 1480) Q 3∶2 (4000 × 2664) Q 5∶4 (3744 × 3000) Q 16∶9 (4000 × 2248) Q 7∶6 (3504 × 3000) Q 1∶1 (2992 × 2992) RAW (11808 × 8754) TIFF (11648 × 8736) Lens mount FUJIFILM G mount Sensitivity • Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 80–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 40, 25600, 51200, or 102400 • Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 100–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 25600 Metering 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering; MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED Exposure control Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE; aperture-priority AE; manual exposure Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV • Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV Technical Notes 12 462 Specifications System Shutter speed Continuous • MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER ⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ¼ s ⁃ Modes S and M: 60 min. to ¼ s ⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min. • ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT + ELECTRONIC ⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s ⁃ Modes S and M: 60 min. to ⁄ s ⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min. O The shutter speed ranges for continuous mode may differ from those listed here. Available frame advance rates (JPEG) CONTINUOUS MECHANICAL ELECTRONIC MODE SHUTTER SHUTTER CH HIGH SPEED BURST 8.0, 5.0 5.3 * CL LOW SPEED BURST 2.0 * In 35mm FORMAT MODE, the frame rate is 8.7 or 5.8 O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var- ies with shooting conditions and type of memory card used. Focus • Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring • Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/ phase-detection AF) • Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL White balance Flash mode 463 Technical Notes Self-timer Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight fluorescent, warm white fluorescent, cool white fluorescent, incandescent, underwater • Still pictures: Off, 2 sec., 10 sec. • Movies: Off, 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec. • MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.), MANUAL, MULTI, OFF • SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (highspeed sync) • RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF 12 System Hot shoe Provided (supports TTL flash control); supports sync speeds as fast as ⁄ s Sync contact X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ⁄ s Sync terminal Provided Electronic viewfinder EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic viewfinder (supplied) (EVF) LCD monitor • Rear monitor: 3.2-in/8.1 cm, 2360k-dot color LCD touch screen with 3-way tilt • Shoulder monitor: 2.09-in/5.31 cm, 219 × 320-dot memory LCD monitor Movies • Movie size: 7 2.76:1, 2 1.38:1, V 16:9, 6 17:9, (with stereo sound) 5 2.35:1, 4 17:9, 3 3:2, 3 16:9, V 16∶9, 1 17∶9, W 16∶9, W 17∶9 O The size that can be selected depend on the IMAGE FORMAT setting. • Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P • Recording/output format: - H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 720, 360, 200, 100, or 50 Mbps) - H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps) - ProRes 422 HQ, ProRes 422, ProRes 422 LT (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2) - HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit 4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2) High-speed movies • Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9 • Frame advance rate: 120P, 100P Technical Notes 12 464 Specifications Input/output terminals Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack Headphone jack socket ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack Remote release connector ⌀3.5 mm 3-pole mini jack Digital input/output USB connector: USB Type-C® USB 10 Gbps HDMI output HDMI connector (Type A) LAN connector 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Technical Notes 12 465 Power supply/other Power supply NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera) Battery life • Battery type: NP-W235 • Lens: GF63mmF2.8 R WR • External flash units: Disabled • Shooting mode: Mode P • AUTO POWER SAVE: ON Number of shots PERFORMANCE LCD EVF BOOST 1 Approx. 500 Approx. 370 NORMAL Approx. 540 Approx. 460 Number of shots (VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip) PERFORMANCE LCD EVF 1 BOOST Approx. 1360 Approx. 1010 NORMAL Approx. 1470 Approx. 1240 Total length of footage that can be recorded on a single charge Continuance Actual battery life battery life of Mode of movie capture movie capture Approx. 60 minutes Approx. 80 minutes V2 Approx. 60 minutes Approx. 90 minutes V3 Approx. 80 minutes Approx. 140 minutes W3 High-speed movies 4 Approx. 65 minutes – 1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) selected PERFORMANCE. 2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps. 3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps. 4 At a frame rate of 120 fps. Technical Notes CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera and SD memory card. Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and the figures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endurance will decline at low temperatures. 12 466 Specifications Power supply/other Camera size 152.4 mm × 117.4 mm × 98.6 mm (46.5 mm excluding projections, (W × H × D) measured at thinnest part)/6.00 in. × 4.62 in. × 3.88 in. (1.83 in.) Camera weight Approx. 949 g/33.5 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and memory card Shooting weight Approx. 1030 g/36.3 oz., including battery and memory card Operating conditions • Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to +40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging) • Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation) Technical Notes Wireless transmitter Wireless LAN Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol) Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia : 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels) (center frequency) • USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia : 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels) : 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53) : 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3) • European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore, Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain, Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan : 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels) : 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53) : 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56) Access protocols Infrastructure Bluetooth® Standards Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy) Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz (center frequency) 12 467 EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic viewfinder Type OLED Size 0.64-in/1.63 cm Pixel count Approximately 9.44 million dots Magnification 1.00× with 50 mm lens (35 mm format) at infinity and diopter set to −1.0 m−1 Diagonal angle of Approximately 47° (horizontal angle of view approximately 38°) view Diopter adjustment −5 to +2 m−1 Eye point Approximately 21 mm Dimensions 52 mm × 37 mm × 78.9 mm/2.05 in. × 1.46 in. × 3.1 in. (W × H × D) Weight Approx. 91 g/3.2 oz. NP-W235 rechargeable battery Nominal voltage 7.2 V Nominal capacity 2350 mAh Rating capacity 2200 mAh Operating 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F temperature 38.92 mm × 22.8 mm × 52.26 mm/ Dimensions 1.5 in. × 0.9 in. × 2.1 in. (W × H × D) Weight Approx. 79 g/2.8 oz. Technical Notes 12 468 Specifications AC-5VJ AC power adapter Manufacturer Address Model name Rated input Input capacity Rated output Average active efficiency Efficiency at load 10% No-load power consumption Operating temperature Weight Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd. No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town, 523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province, PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AC-5VJ 100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Max. 50 VA DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W 84.8 % 84.2 % 0.02 W 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz. O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice. Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain. The appearance of the product may differ from that described in this manual. Technical Notes 12 469 MEMO 470 MEMO 471 7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN https://fujifilm-x.com
advertisement
Related manuals
Download
PDF
advertisement